Sie sind auf Seite 1von 872

AlcatelLucent 9400AWY

78131518232538 GHz
shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
9400AWY Rel.2.1
SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3
User Manual
3DB 16142 JAAA
Ed.01
i Navigation principles

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
This manual is delivered to Customers in electronic format only (file Adobe Acrobat pdf) inside the specific

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


9400AWY Customer Documentation CDROM.
For a comfortable navigation, two hyperlink types are present:

those inside the text window, marked by a blue rectangle around any crossreference to a figure,
table, part, section, chapter, paragraph, numbered list, and page: by clicking such a blue rectangle,
you are led to the referenced component

the bookmarks, present on the left side of the text window. They represent the online handbook
table of contents. Bookmarks can be expanded (clicking on [+] ) or reduced (clicking on [] ). By
clicking on one bookmark, you are led to the referenced part.

WARNING: the bookmark window is not visible if you use Acrobat reader in fullscreen modality.

For further information, refer to Acrobat reader help online.

If printed on paper by Users, it is suggested to divide this manual by numbered separators, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:

CONTENTS SEPARATOR
FRONT MATTER
ii Preliminary information
iii Cautions to avoid equipment damage
iv Documentation set
v Notes on used TCO Suite and associated User Manual
vi Structure of this manual
vii Notes on present edition
VIII Table of contents

PART A : HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK 1


SECTION 1 : HARDWARE INSTALLATION before page 23

PART B : TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 2


SECTION 2 : SYSTEM DESCRIPTION before page 359

3
SECTION 3 : NE MANAGEMENT BY SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
before page 401

4
SECTION 4 : SW INSTALLATION IN THE PC AND COMMISSIONING
before page 665

5
SECTION 5 : MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
before page 737

6
SECTION 6 : APPENDICES
before page 827

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
2 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
ii Preliminary information
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

a) Warranty

Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to
which this handbook refers to.
AlcatelLucent makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. AlcatelLucent will not
be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential,
incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

b) Information

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of AlcatelLucent.

c) Copyright Notification

The technical information of this manual is the property of AlcatelLucent and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

d) Safety recommendations

The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:

1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent
damaging the equipment.
2) Access to the Equipment
Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3) Safety Rules
Recommended safety rules are indicated in Chapter 12 from page 35.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions
stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail.
Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.

e) Service Personnel skill


Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment subject of this handbook.
An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of
merely reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in point iv on page 5 is
considered as not enough.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 3 / 866
iii Cautions to avoid equipment damage

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
a) Unit assemblies
Each of the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT is assembled inside its own box and must
be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly
is supplied by AlcatelLucent as it is and must never be disassembled , with the exception of
operations described in para.57.1, that must be carried out exactly as described.

b) Antistatic protection device kit


Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and boards out of their own box, this kit (Fig. 1. below)
must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the
possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.

COILED CORD

ELASTICIZED BAND

Fig. 1. Antistatic protection device kit

c) Screw tightening torque


In normal operation conditions, all screws (fixing subracks to the rack, fixing cables to connectors,
etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC
performance. The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m)  10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb)  10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking and/or in difficult deinstallation operations, if
necessary.
N.B. This statement is referenced to in many parts of this manual, when necessary.

d) Tightening torque for assembling other equipment parts


To fix other equipment parts, the tightening torque to be used is specified in various parts of the
following chapters:
Chapter 16 (ODU), from page 137
Chapter 17 (IDUODU cable), from page 189

e) IDUODU cable disconnection / connection


Before to disconnect or connect the IDUODU cable (at IDU or ODU side) switch off the
corresponding IDU Main Unit or IDU Extension Unit.

f) Craft Terminal 9400AWY RS232 cable connection / disconnection


If the 9400AWY equipment is switched on, to connect or disconnect the CT RS232 cable (at IDU Main
Units F interface, and/or at PC side), the PC must be switched off.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
4 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
iv Documentation set
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

a) 9400AWY V2.1.3 Documentation CDROM (mandatory)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

The standard Customer Documentation for 9400AWY V2.1.3 is distributed to Customers only by a
specific documentation CDROM, which contains, in electronic format, the following documents:
User Manual : this document
other possible documents. If present, their use is explained in the CDROM menu pages.
b) TCO Suite User Manual (mandatory)
The 9400AWY V2.1.3 NE software management is performed by the SWP TCO Suite, which is
distributed to Customers by a specific SWP TCO Suite CDROM.
The TCO Suite User Manual is contained, in electronic format, in the specific SWP TCO Suite
CDROM. Please, read carefully following point v
c) Plantdependent documentation (mandatory)
The operations for the Hardware Installation (described in the part A of this manual, from page
23 ), and for the LineUp and Commissioning (described in Chapter 42 from page 675 ), must
be done according to specific plantdependent documentation, that can be supplied by
AlcatelLucent, on contract basis.
If such specific plantdependent documentation is not available, Customer must be able to define
relevant data by Himself.
d) Product Release Notes (optional)
Please, refer to point [2] on page 407

v Notes on used TCO Suite and associated User Manual

The SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 is the first TCO Suite version able to manage the 9400AWY V2.1.3
NE,
other successive versions of TCO Suite, able to manage it, may be made available in future,
besides the AWY V2.1.3, the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 is able to manage other versions of the
9400AWY.

Therefore:

if you use the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7:

almost all information present in the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 User Manual is contained also
in this 9400AWY V2.1.3 User Manual. Only the following information must be retrieved from
the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 User Manual:
PC requirements
procedures to install the SWP TCO SUITE in the PC

this 9400AWY V2.1.3 User Manual does not give any information regarding the management,
by the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 , of the other versions of 9400AWY (i.e. different from V2.1.3).
For such different versions, refer to the SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 User Manual

if you use a SWP TCO Suite with version greater than SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7, refer to the User
Manual contained in its SWP TCO Suite CDROM to retrieve information regarding possible new
management features regarding the 9400AWY V2.1.3 NE.

N.B. Information relevant to SWP TCO Suite with version greater than SWP TCO SUITE
Rel.1.7, if any, must be considered preliminary, subject to change and without any
obligation on the part of AlcatelLucent.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 5 / 866
vi Structure of this manual

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Information in this manual is divided into the following parts:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


a) Front matter
This part, with general information, warnings, and table of contents.
b) part A: the Hardware Installation Handbook, starting on page 23 , containing the:
SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION
This section provides whole information regarding Equipment hardware installation and
network interconnections, according to AlcatelLucent WTD LAB. rules. Moreover, it contains
the whole operative information on:
provisioning of equipment items (P/Ns, equipping rules)
their physical position in the system
unit assembly and front panel drawings, with the description on the access point usage
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
cables (drawings and connection tables)
c) part B: the Technical Handbook, starting on page 359 , containing the following sections:
SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION on page 360
This section provides the equipment description (at system, IDU and ODU levels), introduces
the basic information regarding the 9400AWY Rel.2.1 HW architecture, and gives its technical
characteristics.
SECTION 3: NE MANAGEMENT BY SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS on page 401
This section gives the description and use of the SW tools available for the NE management.
SECTION 4: SW INSTALLATION IN THE PC AND COMMISSIONING on page 665
This section provides the whole operative instructions for the preparation of the Craft Terminal
based on the SWP TCO SUITE CDROM and the SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 CDROM, and for
the LineUp and Commissioning of the two NEs making up the radio link.
SECTION 5: MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE on page 737
This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment
maintenance and system SW and HW upgrade.
SECTION 6: APPENDICES on page 827
In this section some additional information and instructions are given:
Appendix A General on Ethernet port characteristics and management
Appendix B ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone network
Appendix C List of symbols and abbreviations, Glossary of terms
Appendix D Customer documentation feedback

d) Handbook print and assembly instructions This part (after handbook last page 866 ):
is not present in the handbook paper copy, if supplied by AlcatelLucent factory.
is present in the pdf file. Customer can use it to print and assembly the handbook in the same
way that is done by AlcatelLucent factory.

vii Notes on present edition

ED.01 is the first validated and released edition of this 9400AWY V2.1.3 User Manual, which applies to
the set of systems equipment, configurations and features associated to the SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 and
to the SWP TCO Suite Rel.1.7. Please, read carefully previous point v

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
6 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
viii Table of contents
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

i Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

ii Preliminary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

iii Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

iv Documentation set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

v Notes on used TCO Suite and associated User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

vi Structure of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

vii Notes on present edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part A: Hardware Installation Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


11 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
11.1 Objects of this procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
11.2 Main phases for 9400AWY hardware and software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
11.3 Hardware installation rules and suggested phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
11.3.1 Hardware installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
11.3.2 Suggested phases for 9400AWY hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

12 SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


12.1 Summary of labels for safety and warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
12.2 Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
12.3 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
12.3.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
12.3.2 Specific safety rules in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
12.3.3 List of safety requirements for workers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
12.3.4 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
12.3.5 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
12.3.6 Equipment connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
12.3.7 EMF safety instructions (microwave radiations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.3.8 Risks of Explosions: labelling and safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.3.9 Moving Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.3.10 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
12.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
12.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
12.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
12.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges (ESD norms) . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.7 9400AWY equipmentspecific identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 7 / 866
13 RACK INSTALLATION AND GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
13.1 Safety rules for rack positioning and fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


13.2 ETSI Rack installation and grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
13.2.1 ETSI Rack positioning and fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13.2.2 ETSI Rack fixing the rack using expansion bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13.2.3 ETSI Rack fixing to floating floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
13.2.4 ETSI Rack grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
13.3 Laborack installation and grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
13.3.1 Laborack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
13.3.2 Laborack grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
13.4 Wall mounting kit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

14 TOP RACK UNIT (TRU) INSTALLATION AND CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59


14.1 General installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
14.2 Introduction to Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
14.3 Top Rack Unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
14.4 Top Rack Unit installation and cabling steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
14.5 Power Supply installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
14.5.1 Kit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
14.5.2 Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
14.5.3 Steps for the connection to the TRU of the power supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14.6 Types and section of cables for grounding and power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

15 INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION AND CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69


15.1 Labels affixed on the IDU Main and Extension units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
15.2 Installation and cabling of IDU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
15.2.1 Composition, installation and cabling rules for IDU components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
15.2.2 Suggested IDU installation and cabling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.3 IDU configuration types and cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.3.1 16E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without
Service Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
15.3.2 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor
120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
15.3.3 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor
75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.3.4 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data
plugin and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
15.3.5 32E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without
Service Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
15.3.6 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor
120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
15.3.7 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor
75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
15.3.8 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
15.3.9 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
15.3.10 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
15.3.11 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
15.3.12 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
8 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.13 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

15.3.14 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
document, use and communication of its contents not

and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

15.3.15 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
15.3.16 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
15.3.17 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
15.3.18 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 75 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
15.3.19 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
and with distributor 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
15.4 IDU horizontal and vertical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
15.4.1 Minimum distances between systems installed horizontally in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . 133
15.4.2 Minimum distances between systems installed vertically in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

16 OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137


16.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
16.1.1 Safety, EMC, EMF, and ESD norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
16.1.2 Tutorial information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
16.1.3 P/Ns of installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
16.1.4 Installation near a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
16.2 ODU types and ODU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
16.2.1 ODU mechanical design and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
16.2.2 ODU operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
16.2.3 Labels affixed on the ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
16.3 1+0 ODU installation (full integrated antenna) all frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
16.3.1 Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
16.3.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 151
16.4 1+0 ODU installation with non integrated antenna all frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
16.4.1 Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU Non integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
16.4.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+0 ODU not integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . 154
16.5 1+1 ODU installation (full integrated antenna, all frequencies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
16.5.1 Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
16.5.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna (1338 GHz) 158
16.5.3 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna (78 GHz) . 163
16.6 1+1 ODU installation with not integrated antenna all frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.6.1 Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU Non integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16.6.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna
(1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
16.6.3 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna (78 GHz) . 171
16.7 Full Indoor ODU configurations (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
16.7.1 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU configuration for installation in LABORACK . . . . . . . . . . 176
16.8 ODU system grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
16.9 Installing the Flextwist waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
16.10 Aligning the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.10.1 Antenna prepointing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.10.2 Fine antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.11 Solar shield installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

17 IDUODU CABLE INSTALLATION MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . 189


17.1 Installation components for IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3
FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 9 / 866
17.1.1 Maximum length and cable types to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
17.1.2 Nconnector for IDU / ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


17.1.3 IDU / ODU cable grounding kit assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

document, use and communication of its contents not


17.2 Suggested IDUODU cable installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


18 NETWORK INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
18.1 Introduction on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.1.1 Solutions for NMS channel continuity between two colocated 9400AWY R.2.1
NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.1.2 Interconnections between a 9400AWY R.2.1 NE with other AlcatelLucent
colocated radio transmission NE types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
18.2 9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections without the Service Protection Box . . . . . 198
18.2.1 NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet ports
and ALM_NMS connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
18.2.2 NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet port
and Ethernet port (of Enhanced Ethernet plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
18.3 General on interconnections with the Service Protection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
18.3.1 EOW audio continuity and EOW party line structure in 9400AWY R.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . 208
18.3.2 General on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
18.3.3 NMS channel and EOW audio continuity with the Service Protection Box . . . . . . . . 210
18.3.4 Available supports for the Service Protection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
18.4 9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections with the Service Protection Box . . . . . . . . 213
18.4.1 NMS Continuity with the Service Protection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
18.4.2 AUDIO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
18.4.3 NMS Ring Protection with Audio Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
18.4.4 ESC Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
18.5 9400AWY MELODIE SNMP interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
18.5.1 NMS Continuity with Audio Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
18.5.2 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 classic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
18.5.3 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
18.5.4 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
18.5.5 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
18.6 9400AWY MELODIE RQ2 interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
18.6.1 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Classic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
18.6.2 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
18.6.3 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
18.6.4 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
18.6.5 RQ2 9.6 Kb/s Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
18.7 E1 interconnections between 9400AWY and 9500MPRE MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

19 UNPACKING AND WAREHOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239


19.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
19.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
19.2.1 Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
19.2.2 Unpacking phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
19.2.3 Shipping crate content check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
19.3 Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

110 IDU INSTALLATION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

111 ODU INSTALLATION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


111.1 Full integrated or Not Integrated antenna installation components . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
111.1.1 9470 AWY ODU installation components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
111.1.2 9413 AWY ODU installation components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
10 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
111.1.3 9415 AWY ODU installation components ................................. 253
111.1.4 9418 AWY ODU installation components ................................. 254
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

111.1.5 9423 AWY ODU installation components ................................. 255


document, use and communication of its contents not

111.1.6 9425 AWY ODU installation components ................................. 256


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

111.1.7 9438 AWY ODU installation components ................................. 257


111.2 Part lists and characteristics of ODU transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
111.2.1 Part lists of ODUs with external diplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
111.2.2 Part lists of ODUs with embedded diplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
111.3 Types of RF couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
111.3.1 RF couplers for 7/8GHz bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
111.3.2 RF couplers for bands from 13 to 38GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
111.4 Types of Pole Mounting Installation kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
111.4.1 FULL INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting Installation kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
111.4.2 NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting Installation kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
111.5 Types of nose adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

112 VIEWS OF IDU UNITS, CONNECTOR PINOUT, AND SIGNAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . 287
112.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
112.2 Description of IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
112.2.1 IDU Main Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
112.2.2 ECT RS232 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
112.2.3 OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
112.2.4 Gbit Ethernet tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
112.3 Description of IDU Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
112.3.1 IDU Extension Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
112.4 Description of E1 Protection box (Tributary Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
112.4.1 E1 Protection box: pinout of lineside connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
112.5 Description of Services Protection box (Auxiliary Service Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
112.5.1 Services Protection box: pinout of lineside connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
112.6 Power Supply connector pinout (Main and Extension units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
112.7 Connector for IDUODU cable (Main and Extension units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
112.8 1/16 E1 I/O SCSI 68pin Female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
112.9 17/32 E1 I/O SCSI 68pin Female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
112.10 ALMNMS (G703/V11) SubD 44pin Female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
112.11 AUDIOUSER SERV SubD 44pin Female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
112.12 USER SERV SubD 44pin Female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
112.13 Description of user signals with alternative connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
112.13.1 E1 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
112.13.2 Alarms and Housekeeping signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
112.13.3 Alternative connectors for Audio, NMS, and User Service Channels signals . . . . 321
112.13.4 NMS V11 Audio 1 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
112.13.5 NMS G703 Audio 2 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
112.13.6 User service channels signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

113 DESCRIPTION OF INTERCONNECTION AND SIGNAL CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327


113.1 Cable 3CC07759ABAA Cable for distributor BNC 8 x 2 Mbit/s (L= 2m) . . . . . . . . 329
113.2 Cable 3CC7885ABAA Cable for distributor 1.6/5.6 8 x 2 Mbit/s (L= 2m) . . . . . . . 330
113.3 Cable 3CC52115ABAA (L= 15m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
113.4 Cable 3CC52116AAAA (L= 0.5m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
113.5 Cable 3CC52117ABAA (L= 15m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
113.6 Cable 3CC52118AAAA (L= 1m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 11 / 866
113.7 Cable 3CC52119AAAA (L= 1.6) or 3CC52120AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
113.8 Cable 3CC52121AAAA (L= 1m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


113.9 Cable 3CC52130AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3CC52131AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
113.10 Cable 3CC52132AAAA (L= 1m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
113.11 Cable 3CC52133AAAA SCSI68 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
113.12 Cable 3CC52134AAAA Cord 120 Ohm SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x 16 pairs . . . . . . . . 341
113.13 RJ45RJ45 Cat.5e Ethernet cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
113.13.1 RJ45RJ45 Cat.5e Direct Ethernet cables 3CC52141Axxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
113.13.2 RJ45RJ45 Cat.5e Cross Ethernet cables 3CC52142Axxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
113.14 Cable 3CC52143ABAA (L= 1.6m) or 3CC52143ACAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
113.15 Cables 3CC52150AAAA (L=1.6 m) and 3CC52150ABAA (L=6.4 m)
SCSI68/SCSI68 M/M CROSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
113.16 Cable 3CC52157AAAA 2 SCSI MALE TO 4 TERMINALS MODULES . . . . . . . . . . 346
113.17 Cable 3DB05594AAA SubD 15pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
113.18 Cable 3DB05922AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB05923AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
113.19 Cable 3DB10063AAAA (L= 1.6) or 3DB10064AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
113.20 Cable 3DB10087AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB10088AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
113.21 Cable 3DB10089AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB10090AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
113.22 Cable 3DB10091AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB10092AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
113.23 Cable 3DB10093AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB10094AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
113.24 Cable 3DB10095AAAA (L= 1.6m) or 3DB10096AAAA (L= 6.4m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
113.25 Cable 3DB10100AAAA (L= 1m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
113.26 Cable 3DB10101AAAA (Adapter ESC/NMS V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
113.27 Cable 3DB16126ABAA SCSI100 wire for 1+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Part B: Technical Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360


21 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
21.1 Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
21.2 Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
21.2.1 Splitmount architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
21.2.2 IDU (Indoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
21.2.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
21.2.4 ODU and antenna configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
21.2.5 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
21.3 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
21.3.1 Available system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
21.3.2 1+0 Unprotected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
21.3.3 1+1 Protected Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
21.3.4 Detailed IDU block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
21.3.5 IDUODU and station compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
21.4 Provisioning of equipment items (summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

22 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389


22.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
22.1.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
22.1.2 Reference system standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
22.1.3 RF channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
12 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
22.1.4 Transmitted power at antenna port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
22.1.5 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

22.1.6 ETSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394


document, use and communication of its contents not

22.1.7 Protection switching system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

22.2 Tributary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397


22.3 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
22.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
22.5 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
22.6 Manmachine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
22.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
22.8 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
22.9 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
22.10 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
22.10.1 Operating environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
22.10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility/safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
22.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
22.11 Dismantling & Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

SECTION 3: NE MANAGEMENT BY SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 401


31 ITEMS FOR SW DISTRIBUTION TO CUSTOMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
31.1 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
31.1.1 Flash Card part numbers and associated Licence Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
31.1.2 Physical description of Flash Cards & Licence Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
31.2 Description of SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 and SWP TCO SUITE CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . 407
31.2.1 Part numbers of SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 and SWP TCO SUITE CDROMs . . . . . . 407
31.2.2 Notes on SWP CDROM identification, and Product Release Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
31.2.3 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 CDROM contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
31.2.4 SWP TCO SUITE Rel.1.7 CDROM contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

32 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE CRAFT TERMINAL AND THE NE, AND SECURITY
POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
32.1 Types of physical access from the PC to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
32.2 PCNE network addressing rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
32.2.1 NEs management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
32.2.2 NEs local IP address and Ethernet Configuration IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
32.2.3 NE reachability from the CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
32.2.4 Networking scenarios for PC connection to the NEs local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . 416
32.3 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
32.3.1 Summary of security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
32.3.2 Security by operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
32.3.3 Security by community string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
32.3.4 Security by access lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

33 GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423


33.1 Preparation of the Craft Terminal based on SWP TCO SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
33.2 Equipment SW management by SWP TCO SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
33.2.1 Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
33.2.2 Procedures for the management of the NE software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
33.2.3 NE data compatibility between SWP 2.1.x versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
33.3 Startup and functions of the TCO SUITE Main Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
33.4 Checks the operator must do before accessing a NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 13 / 866
33.5 Common behavior of NE login, and application logoff, for the NEinteractive
Provisioning Tool and Alarms & Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


33.5.1 Constraints and preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

document, use and communication of its contents not


33.5.2 NE login procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


33.5.3 Application logoff procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
33.6 Close Current Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
33.7 Operational & Maintenance WebEML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
33.8 Operational & Maintenance 1320CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

34 PROVISIONING TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443


34.1 Provisioning Tool overview, and startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
34.2 Full Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
34.2.1 Note on the use of the bottom buttons available in the screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
34.2.2 Full Configuration Procedure steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

35 ALARMS & SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481


35.1 Alarms & Settings overview, startup, and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
35.2 Alarms & Settings functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
35.2.1 Date & Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
35.2.2 Configuration Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
35.2.3 Configuration Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
35.2.4 Get Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
35.2.5 Active Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
35.2.6 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
35.2.7 Modem Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
35.2.8 Licence Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
35.2.9 NAT Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

36 NETO (NETWORK ELEMENT OVERVIEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497


36.1 General on NEtO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
36.1.1 NEtO functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
36.1.2 NEtO sessions and constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
36.2 NE access constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
36.3 Summary of actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
36.3.1 Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
36.3.2 Operations with NEtO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
36.4 Details on NEtO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
36.4.1 Supervision Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
36.4.2 Supervision and Alarm Synthesis roundshaped icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
36.4.3 NEtO screen minimize and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
36.4.4 NEtO icon in the tray bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
36.4.5 NE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
36.4.6 Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
36.4.7 How to close the NEtO session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
36.5 NE list management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

37 9400AWY WEBEML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511


37.1 How to open the 9400AWY NE WebEML main view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
37.2 9400AWY main view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
37.3 View Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
37.3.1 Resource Tree Area and Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
37.3.2 Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
37.4 Main tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
14 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
37.5 Severity alarm synthesis, and Domain alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
37.6 Management state control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

37.7 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft Terminal access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

37.7.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
37.7.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . 519
37.8 Introduction to the WebEML menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
37.8.1 Security by operator profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
37.8.2 Menu organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
37.8.3 Command button policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
37.8.4 Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
37.8.5 Views menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
37.8.6 Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
37.8.7 Diagnosis menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
37.8.8 Supervision menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
37.8.9 SW download menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

38 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
38.1 NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
38.2 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
38.2.1 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
38.2.2 NTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
38.2.3 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
38.2.4 IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
38.2.5 Routing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
38.2.6 Vlan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
38.3 Alarm Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
38.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
38.4 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
38.4.1 NE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
38.4.2 Link Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
38.4.3 Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

39 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
39.1 Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
39.2 IDU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
39.2.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
39.2.2 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
39.2.3 Board level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
39.3 ODU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
39.4 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
39.4.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
39.4.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
39.4.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

310 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563


310.1 Areas of the Line Interface domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
310.2 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
310.2.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
310.2.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
310.2.3 Tributaries PDH Configuration tab panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
310.2.4 NMS interfaces Configuration tab panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
310.2.5 Data Tributaries Configuration tab panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 15 / 866
311 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
311.1 Areas of the Radio domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


311.2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
311.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
311.3.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
311.3.2 ODU service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
311.3.3 Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
311.4 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
311.5 RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
311.5.1 ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
311.5.2 RTPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
311.6 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
311.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
311.6.2 How to read a Power Measurement file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
311.7 BER measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

312 EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587


312.1 Input External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
312.2 Output External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

313 MANAGEMENT OF THE SECURITY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591


313.1 Management of security by operator profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
313.2 Management of security by community string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
313.3 Management of security by access lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

314 MIB MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599


314.1 Default repository folders of MIB backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
314.2 Craft Terminal commands for the management of MIB backup files . . . . . . . . . . 600
314.3 How to perform the MIB backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
314.4 How to perform the MIB restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
314.5 How to remove a MIB backup file from the repository folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

315 ALARMS MONITOR AND EVENT LOG BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605


315.1 Log switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
315.2 Alarms Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
315.2.1 Alarms Monitor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
315.2.2 Alarms Monitor startup for one single NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
315.2.3 Alarms Monitor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
315.2.4 Multiple NE Alarms Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
315.2.5 Filters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
315.2.6 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
315.2.7 Printing the alarms and logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
315.2.8 Exporting the alarms and logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
315.2.9 Navigate from AM to USM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
315.2.10 Navigate from USM to AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
315.2.11 Shortcut icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
315.3 Event Log Browser (ELB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
315.3.1 ELB scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
315.3.2 ELB startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
315.3.3 Event Log Table screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
16 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
316 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
316.1 Software Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

316.2 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

316.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627


316.2.2 Remote Inventory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
316.3 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
316.4 Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
316.5 Current Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
316.6 Ethernet Port Counters Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
316.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
316.6.2 Monitoring on disabled ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
316.6.3 Displaying modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

317 PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635


317.1 Possible Resource Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
317.2 Radio Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
317.2.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
317.2.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
317.3 HSB Transmission Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
317.3.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
317.3.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
317.4 Rx Static Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
317.5 Mux/Demux Protection (EPS) Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
317.5.1 Schema Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
317.5.2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

318 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645


318.1 General information, and Loopback timeout management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
318.2 Hardware implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
318.2.1 IDU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
318.2.2 ODU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
318.3 Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
318.4 Loopback domain views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
318.5 How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
318.6 How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

319 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657


319.1 General information on the performance monitoring process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
319.2 Performance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
319.3 CD (Current Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
319.3.1 CD parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
319.3.2 CD Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
319.4 HD (History Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
319.4.1 HD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
319.5 Threshold tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
319.5.1 How to change a threshold table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
319.5.2 How to create a threshold table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
319.5.3 Threshold table association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 17 / 866
SECTION 4: SW INSTALLATION IN THE PC, AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . 665
41 PREPARATION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL BASED ON THE SWP TCO SUITE AND THE

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
41.1 PC requirements to run and install the SWP TCO SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
41.2 Craft Terminal preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
41.3 Operation sequence for the JRE installation, and to perform the Local copy
of the TCO Suite and of the WebEML (Jusm/CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
41.4 LLMAN installation and configuration, and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
41.4.1 LLMAN installation and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
41.4.2 How to start and use the LLMAN application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
41.4.3 Full information regarding the use of the LLMAN application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
41.5 Local Copy of the SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

42 LINEUP AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675


42.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
42.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
42.1.2 SafetyEMCEMFESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . 677
42.1.3 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
42.1.4 Summary of the lineup, commissioning, and acceptance phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
42.1.5 General information about test bench drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
42.2 Phase 1: Commissioning of STATION A (NE turn up and data definition) . . . . . . . . 681
42.2.1 Preliminary operations before IDU power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
42.2.2 Power on the IDU unit(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
42.2.3 Craft Terminal switch on, and PC IP setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
42.2.4 Check the SWP running in the NEs Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
42.2.5 Define the NE data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
42.2.6 New IP setting of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
42.3 Phase 1: Commissioning of STATION B (NE turn up and data definition) . . . . . . . . 686
42.4 Note on NE login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
42.5 Phase 1: Fine antenna alignment, and preliminary checks (stations A & B) . . . . . . 687
42.5.1 Wait for the possible ODU SW upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
42.5.2 Fine antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
42.5.3 Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
42.6 End of commissioning phase 1 in STATION A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
42.7 Phase 2: Commissioning of station A (acceptance test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
42.7.1 Start the NEinteractive Acceptance Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
42.7.2 Step 1: Indoor installation visual inspection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
42.7.3 Step 2: Outdoor installation visual inspection check, and Antenna data . . . . . . . . . . 695
42.7.4 Step 3: Channel protection switch (for 1+1 configurations only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
42.7.5 Step 3: Loopback Tests on channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
42.7.6 Step 3: Point to point BER loop tests on E1 Tributaries on Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
42.7.7 Step 3: Point to point BER loop tests on Ethernet Ch. for Radio Channel 1
(optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
42.7.8 Step 3: Rx level (dBm) tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
42.7.9 Step 4: Housekeeping input alarms acquisition (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
42.7.10 Step 4: Housekeeping output alarms acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
42.7.11 Step 4: Hop Stability Test on Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
42.7.12 Channel 0 functionality tests (1+1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
42.7.13 Step 5: Equipment identification, and NE software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
42.7.14 Step 6: Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
42.7.15 Step 7: Summary readonly tab panels, and TRS save and print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
42.8 Phase 2: Commissioning of station B (acceptance test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
18 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
42.9 Phase 3: Final acceptance of the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
42.10 Phase 4: Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

42.11 Annex A: fine antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

42.12 Annex B: light service kit cable operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

43 USE OF THE ACCEPTANCE TOOL TO WRITE THE TRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721


43.1 Acceptance Tool scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
43.2 Acceptance Tool start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
43.3 Acceptance Tool in NEinteractive modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
43.3.1 Bench setup and startup of the NEinteractive Acceptance Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
43.3.2 Main functions of the NEinteractive Acceptance Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
43.3.3 Create Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
43.3.4 Steps of the Acceptance Tools Create Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
43.4 Acceptance Tool in not NEinteractive modality (offline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

SECTION 5: MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737


51 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
51.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
51.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
51.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
51.4 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

52 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743


52.1 Setting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
52.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . 744

53 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745


53.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
53.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
53.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
53.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
53.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
53.3.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
53.3.2 ODU Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
53.3.3 IDU Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
53.3.4 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
53.3.5 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

54 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751


54.1 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
54.1.1 LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
54.1.2 Alarm LEDs on the IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
54.1.3 Alarm LEDs on the IDU EXTENSION unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
54.2 TCO Suite commonly used functions for system status display and checks . . . . . 753
54.2.1 Viewing the NE alarms by NEtO Supervision, and Alarm Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
54.2.2 Viewing the NE status by WebEML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

55 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755


55.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
55.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
55.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
55.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3
FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 19 / 866
55.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
55.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


55.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
55.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
55.5 Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
55.6 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
55.6.1 Alarm acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
55.6.2 Alarm Attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
55.7 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
55.8 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
55.8.1 Diagnosis menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
55.8.2 Alarm Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
55.8.3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.8.4 Operators Controls of the protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.8.5 Tx mute function (local and remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.8.6 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.8.7 BER measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.8.8 Commissioning tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
55.9 Link troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
55.9.1 Main tools available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
55.9.2 Alarms and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
55.10 Hints on the troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
55.10.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
55.10.2 Analog measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
55.10.3 NMS 64 kbit/s V.11 and G.703 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
55.10.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
55.10.5 Remote NE unreachable for deep fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
55.10.6 Configuration change from 4 QAM to 16 QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
55.10.7 Correct use of Full Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
55.10.8 Abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
55.10.9 Tx Mute functionality for interferences investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
55.11 IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
55.11.1 IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure (CH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
55.11.2 IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure (CH0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
55.12 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
55.13 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
55.13.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
55.13.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790

56 SPARE FLASH CARD MANAGEMENT, AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 793


56.1 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
56.2 Flash Card replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
56.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
56.2.2 Execution of the Flash Card replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

57 SYSTEM HARDWARE UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797


57.1 Installation of plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
57.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
57.1.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
57.2 Upgrade from 1+0 to 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
57.2.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
57.2.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


FRONT MATTER
20 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
58 PROCEDURE TO CHANGE CAPACITY/MODULATION/FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

59 NE UPGRADE TO V2.1.3 FROM PREVIOUS VERSION V2.1.X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811


permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

59.1 Introduction and restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

59.2 How to check the SW versions present in the NEs flash card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
59.3 How to perform the SWP download to the NE, and its activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
59.3.1 Remotion of the 2 x Fast Ethernet plugin, if equipped (stations A and B) . . . . . . 815
59.3.2 CT startup, and check for the availability of the SWP to be downloaded . . . . . . . . 816
59.3.3 NE login and initial operations (stations A and B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
59.3.4 SW download to the NE (station A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
59.3.5 Activation of the new Software Package on the NE (station A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
59.3.6 Additional operations for upgrade from V2.1.0 (station A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
59.3.7 Operations on station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
59.3.8 Functional checks on the radio link (stations A and B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
59.3.9 NE data backup (stations A and B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
59.4 Notes about NE SW downgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827


61 APPENDIX A: GENERAL ON ETHERNET PORT CHARACTERISTICS AND
MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
61.1 Ethernet Physical Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
61.2 MDI/MDIX crossover (AutoMDI/MDIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
61.3 Frame size, Rx checksum and FCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
61.4 Ethernet capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
61.5 Ethernet flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
61.6 Ethernet interface management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
61.7 Auto Link Shutdown (ALiS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
61.8 Ethernet Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
61.9 VLAN characteristics and management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

62 APPENDIX B: ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE


NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
62.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
62.2 Certified equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
62.3 Connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
62.4 Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
62.4.1 Setting of Sportster Flash Modem & 3Com 56K Faxmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
62.4.2 TD32 AC Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
62.5 PC laptop Dell Latitude setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
62.6 Setting up the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
62.7 Changing the ECTequipment connection speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
62.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
62.7.2 Configuration at NE side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
62.7.3 Configuration at PC side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848

63 APPENDIX C: LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS, GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . 849


63.1 List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
63.2 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
63.3 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

64 APPENDIX D: CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863


USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3
FRONT MATTER
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 21 / 866
a)

22 / 866
END OF SECTION

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Part A: Hardware Installation Handbook

This Hardware Installation Handbook (from this page 23 to page 358 ) is the part A of the whole User
Manual.

In case of paper copy, for its use during equipment installation operations, this part can be extracted from
the whole handbook, but take into account that, inside it, there are information referenced to (i.e.
necessary) by part B (Technical Handbook).

N.B. Cross references to page numbers > 358 are references to the part B (Technical Handbook).
Such references are for scopes (descriptions and maintenance) that are out of the aim of this
Hardware Installation Handbook, so that they can be ignored during the installation phases.

N.B. This section contains also some descriptions concerning the NE management performed by the
SWP TCO Suite. For such parts, please read carefully the point v Notes on used TCO Suite
and associated User Manual on page 5

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 23 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION

SECTION CONTENT PAGE

Installation procedures

Chapter 11 Installation and commissioning summary 25

Chapter 12 Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling 35

Chapter 13 Rack installation and grounding 49

Chapter 14 Top Rack Unit (TRU) installation and cabling 59

Chapter 15 Indoor Unit installation and cabling 69

Chapter 16 Outdoor Unit installation 137

Chapter 17 IDUODU cable installation material and installation


189
procedure

Chapter 18 Network interconnections


This chapter gives the interconnection diagrams and the associated list of cables
for network interconnections regarding the NMS channel continuity, and the EOW 195
audio continuity, and describes the E1 interconnections with the 9500MPRE
Microwave Packet Radio MSS equipment

Installation material
N.B. Installation components for IDUODU cable are described in para.17.1
on page 189

Chapter 19 Unpacking and warehousing 239

Chapter 110 IDU installation components 243

Chapter 111 ODU installation components 249

Additional information for installation, commissioning, and maintenance

Chapter 112 Views of IDU units, connector pinout, and signal description 287

Chapter 113 Description of interconnection and signal cables 327

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
24 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
11 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING SUMMARY
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter deals with:

Subject On page

Objects of this procedure below

Main phases for 9400AWY hardware and software installation 26

Hardware installation rules and suggested phases 27

11.1 Objects of this procedure

Whenever, before starting installation and commissioning operations described in the following, you like
to have an overview of the system, please refer to:
chapter 21 from page 361 , for descriptions at hardware level
para.33.2 from page 424 , for descriptions at NE software management level

9400AWY RADIO LINK

STATION A STATION B
ETSI RADIO
ODU ODU
CH1 CH1
IDUODU IDUODU
ODU ODU
cable CH1 CH0 CH0 cable CH1

IDUODU IDUODU
ETSI PDH cable CH0 cable CH0 ETSI PDH
ETHERNET ETHERNET
SERVICE CH. SERVICE CH.
IDU SUPERVISION IDU
NETWORK

All procedures for the hardware and software installation, and those for the commissioning of the single
station and of the radio link, are contained in this manual. The procedures for:

the hardware installation, are contained in this Hardware Installation Handbook (from this page
25 to page 236 )

the software installation, and those for the commissioning of the single station and of the radio link,
are contained in the Technical Handbook (from page 359 )

of the whole User Manual. Next para.11.2 specifies where to find such information in this manual.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 25 / 866
11.2 Main phases for 9400AWY hardware and software installation

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


The summary procedure depicted below presumes that the NEs Flash Card (for both stations) is as

document, use and communication of its contents not


delivered from AlcatelLucent factory, i.e.:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


with SWP version = V2.1.3

with default configuration data.

1) Perform the HW INSTALLATION

Install and cable:

the STATION A

and the STATION B

as described in para.11.3 from page 27

2) Prepare the CRAFT TERMINAL, as described in chapter 41 from page 667

3) Perform the EQUIPMENT POWERON AND COMMISSIONING and the RADIO LINK
COMMISSIONING

as described in chapter 42 from page 675

and reporting the test results in the document TRS, using the Acceptance Tool described in
chapter 43 on page 721

4) Set the SECURITY PARAMETERS

as described in chapter 313 from page 591

5) Perform the NE DATA BACKUP

as described in point [1] on page 427

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
26 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
11.3 Hardware installation rules and suggested phases
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

11.3.1 Hardware installation rules


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

[1] Specific plant documentation


The 9400AWY equipment should be installed and cabled making reference to the specific plant
documentation. If such documentation is not available, you must be able to create plant installation
data by yourself. You can find some information to create plant installation data in:

Subject Reference
para.22.8 on page 398
Rules for power supply
para.14.6 on page 67
Rules for Equipment emitting RF power para.12.3.7.1 on page 43
Rules for IDU configuration types and cabling para.15.3 from page 101
Rules for ODU and antenna configurations para.21.2.4 on pages 372 to 375
Rules for installation and cabling of IDU
para.15.2.1 on pages 71 to 74
components
Rules for IDUODU cable para.17.1.1 on page 189

[2] Warning: capacity extension


In the case of successive capacity extensions, pay attention to the following:
IDUODU (Coax Cable 50 ohm)
9400 AWY R.2.1 can be provided with ODUs able to support 32 x E1 capacity even with IDU
subequipped configurations supporting 16 x E1 maximum.
With coax cable, there are limitation in the maximum length; a more performing cable could be
necessary to cover specific cases (see para.17.1.1 on page 189 for details)
IDU installation in Rack
To migrate:
from 1+0 to 1+1 configurations
from configurations without protection boxes to configurations with protection boxes
the IDU requires more room (see Chapter 15 from page 133 for details)
For an easy successive extension, the required additional room needed should be left free.
[3] Installation Tools required
The 9400AWY system is supplied with three Tools Bags: Station Tools Bag, Maintenance Tools Bag,
and Installation Tools Bag. These bags are described in para.53.2.2 on page 746
[4] General installation rules

ATTENTION EMC NORMS

When carrying out the given operations observe the norms states in para.12.4 on page 46
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
during the touching of the equipment.
All the measures must be done at the MDF/CDF points (MDF= Mini Distributor Frame, CDF=
Customer Distributor Frame).
The equipment may be installed only in RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATIONS, and be
permanently connected to a PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONDUCTOR as described in this
section.
Equipotential bonding must be applied for all equipments in the location.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 27 / 866
11.3.2 Suggested phases for 9400AWY hardware installation

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


[1] Read safety, EMC, EMF, and ESD norms and cautions to avoid equipment damage

document, use and communication of its contents not


SAFETY RULES:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Read chapter 12 from page 35 , and point iii on page 4 , which describe the operations
and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating personnel during the working
phases, and to guarantee equipment safety. Read them with accuracy before to start
every action on the equipment.

Perform following steps for STATION A and STATION B, making reference to the specific plant
documentation:

[2] Check the installation material


Unpack the shipping crate(s) and check its/their content for the presence of all installation material
required for the configuration stated in the plant documentation. For details, if necessary, refer to
chapter 19 from page 239

[3] Check the IDUODU distance


Using the plant documentation, and/or making a survey, verify that the distance between IDU and
ODU Nconnectors (actual length of the cable path) comply with that specified in para.17.1.1 on
page 189 , according to the used cable

[4] Perform the rack installation and grounding

Item: rack

(example)

Rack Installation
Operations to do:
Rack grounding
Chapter 13 from page 49
Details in: N.B. the same chapter describes the kit for the installation on the
wall

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
28 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[5] Perform the installation and cabling of the TRU
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Item: TRU
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

+
TRU installation
Operations to do: TRU grounding
Connection of the TRU to the plant power supply
Details in: Chapter 14 on pages 59 to 63

[6] Prepare the power supply cables for IDU unit(s)

Item: Power Supply cable(s) for IDU MAIN (and EXTENSION) units

Cable construction
Operations to do:
Cable connection to the TRU
Details in: Chapter 14 on pages 64 to 66

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 29 / 866
[7] Perform the installation and cabling of Indoor Unit

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Item: IDU shelves and cables

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
(example)

Insertion of the Flash Card in the IDU MAIN unit (rear side)
Installation of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU EXTENSION unit
(if present in the configuration)
Optional grounding of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU
EXTENSION unit (if present in the configuration)
Assembling and installation of the PROTECTION BOXES (if
present in the configuration)
Interconnection of IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units (only for 1+1
Operations to do: systems)
Connection of power supply cable to the IDU MAIN unit, and to the
IDU EXTENSION unit (if present in the configuration)
Preparation of cables for connection of IDU to Customer DDF (if
present in the configuration)
Installation of the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS (if present in the
configuration)
Positioning and connection of signal cables (according to system
configuration)
Chapter 15 on pages 69 to 100
Details in:
Chapter 18 from page 195 (for network interconnections)

[8] Perform the installation and grounding of Outdoor Unit(s) and Antenna(s)

Read warnings on page 138 ,


then proceed according to the ODU configuration (5 cases):

ODU Antenna Frequency Procedure

full integrated all point a ) on page 31


1+0
not integrated all point b ) on page 31

full integrated all point c ) on page 32


1+1 HSB
one antenna not integrated all point d ) on page 33

1+0 or 1+1
external 78 GHz para.16.7 from page 175
full Indoor ODU

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
30 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
a) 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna all frequencies
Item: 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna all frequencies
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

pole
mounting
full integrated antenna
ODU (1+0)

(example)

Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and


BRANCHING boxes (only for ODU with external diplexer)
Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting
Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose
Take off the solar shield from the ODU transceiver
Operations to do:
Install the ODU on Antennas nose adapter
Ground the ODU system
Prepoint the antenna
Reinstall the solar shield onto the ODU transceiver
Affix the EMF stickers
Details in: Para.16.3 on pages 150 to 152

b) 1+0 ODU not integrated antenna all frequencies


Item: 1+0 ODU not integrated antenna all frequencies

antenna pole mounting


flextwist not integrated antenna

ODU (1+0)

ODU pole mounting


(example)

Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and


BRANCHING boxes (only for ODU with external diplexer)
Install the Nose Adapter on the Pole Mounting for not integrated
antenna
Install the Pole Mounting for not integrated antenna
Take off the solar shield from the ODU transceiver
Install the ODU
Operations to do: Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting
Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mountings nose
adapter to the external antenna, by means of the Flextwist
waveguide
Ground the ODU system
Prepoint the antenna
Reinstall the solar shield onto the ODU transceiver
Affix the EMF stickers
Details in: Para.16.4 on pages 153 to 156

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 31 / 866
c) 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna all frequencies

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Item: 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna all frequencies

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
1338 GHz 78 GHz
full integrated antenna full integrated antenna

ODU
CH0

ODU
CH1

ODU ODU
CH0 pole pole
RF CH1 RF coupler
mounting mounting
coupler

Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and


BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs with external diplexer)
Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting
Check or change the polarization of the RF coupler
Install the RF coupler on antennas nose adapter
Operations to do: For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield
Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler
Ground the ODU system
Prepoint the antenna
Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver
Affix the EMF stickers

For:
all frequencies: para.16.5.1 on page 157 (typical installation
Details in: layout)
1338 GHz: para.16.5.2 on pages 158 to 162 (procedure)
78 GHz: para.16.5.3 on pages 163 to 165 (procedure)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
32 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
d) 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna all frequencies
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Item: 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna all frequencies


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

antenna pole mounting


ODU (1+1) not integrated
antenna

flextwist waveguide

ODU pole mounting

Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and


BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs with external diplexer)
Install the Nose Adapter on the not integrated antenna Pole
Mounting for ODU
Install the not integrated antenna Pole Mounting for ODU
Install the RF coupler on the nose adapter
For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield
Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler
Operations to do:
Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting
Connect the antenna side (flange) of the ODU Pole Mountings
nose adapter to the external antenna, by means of the Flextwist
waveguide
Ground the ODU system
Prepoint the antenna
Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver
Affix the EMF stickers

For:
all frequencies: para.16.6.1 on page 166 (typical installation
Details in: layout)
1338 GHz: para.16.6.2 on pages 167 to 170 (procedure)
78 GHz: para.16.6.3 on pages 171 to 174 (procedure)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 33 / 866
[9] Perform the installation and cabling of IDUODU cable(s)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Item: IDUODU cable(s)

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
ODU
CH1
IDUODU
cable CH1 ODU
CH0

IDUODU
cable CH0

IDU

Install the cable in the cable tray


Install the cable in the feed thru plate
Mount the N connectors on the cable
Operations to do: Ground the cable
Label and connect the cable to the ODU
Waterproof the connector on ODU
Label and connect the cable to the IDU

Details in: Chapter 17 from page 189

End of hardware installation procedure

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
34 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12 SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT
LABELLING
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested [see also point d )
on page 3 ] that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. The
stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the related
manuals listed in point iv on page 5

Subject On page
Summary of labels for safety and warning below
Compliance with International Standards 36
Safety rules 36
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) 46
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges (ESD norms) 47
Suggestions, notes and cautions 47
9400AWY equipmentspecific identification labels 47

12.1 Summary of labels for safety and warning

LABEL ON EQUIPMENT MEANING


Dangerous Electrical Voltages
see para.12.3.5 on page 42

Equipment connection to earth


see para.12.3.6 on page 42

Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms)


see para.12.3.7 on page 43

Risk of explosion
see para.12.3.8 on page 45

Moving mechanical parts


see para.12.3.9 on page 45

Heatradiating mechanical parts


see para.12.3.10 on page 45

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges


see para.12.5 on page 47

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic


Equipment) Logo
see para.22.10.3 on page 399

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 35 / 866
12.2 Compliance with International Standards

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Refer to chapter 22 from page 389

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
12.3 Safety rules

Subject On page

General safety rules 37

Specific safety rules in this Manual 37

List of safety requirements for workers 38

Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command 41

Dangerous Electrical Voltages 42

Equipment connection to earth 42

EMF safety instructions (microwave radiations)

Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation


43
procedure)

EMF sticker positioning

Compliance boundaries 44

Risks of Explosions: labelling and safety instructions 45

Moving Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions 45

Heatradiating Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions 45

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
36 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12.3.1 General safety rules


permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
document, use and communication of its contents not

carefully read the related parts of this manual or other handbooks.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Observe safety rules:


when equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
in case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :

personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be


aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.

The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.

The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
it is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).

12.3.2 Specific safety rules in this Manual

The safety rules described in this manual are


SAFETY RULES
distinguished by the following symbol and statement:

They are specified in the following parts:


Part A (Hardware Installation Handbook):
chapter 11 on page 28
chapter 12 on pages 35 to 45 (this chapter)
chapter 13 on pages 50 , 55 , 57
chapter 14 on pages 60 , 62 , 63 , 66
chapter 15 on pages 75 , 82
chapter 16 on page 138
chapter 17 on page 189
Part B (Technical Handbook):
chapter 42 on page 719
chapter 55 on pages 756 , 757 , 781 , 785 , 787

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 37 / 866
12.3.3 List of safety requirements for workers

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Every person on site must respect the safety requirements mentioned below:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Delegation of Power

Safety of the Individual

Safety of the Perimeter of Work

Installation Site

Every technician must regularly check his safety equipment and the deadline of use.

[1] Delegation of Power

Aptitude Required to Work on Site

A medical certificate of aptitude to work at height.

A certificate of aptitude to work on electrical equipment and to work


at height.

In certain cases, a climbing certificate.

any time,
At any time,you
youmust
mustbebe
ableable
to showyour
to show yourpersonal
personal certificates.
certificates.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
38 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[2] Safety of the Individual
2 operators at least for any work:
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

at height
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

on electrical equipment

near live stripped parts

In these three cases, a medical certificate of aptitude


for work is required.

Requirements to Work at Height

A safety harness

2m shockabsorbing lanyards

A tether adjustment

The material to prevent falls when climbing


the pylon

Requirements to Work with Cords

A rope grab

Two semistatic cords

Requirements if a Technician works on the Pylon

A helmet

Safety shoes

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 39 / 866
[3] Safety of the Perimeter of Work

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Requirements

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Delimit the perimeter of danger area (lifting area) with road stripes.

Cordon off the danger area during the lifting operation.

As soon as a technician works on the pylon, everyone on the


ground has to wear a helmet and safety shoes.

Post up the safety agreement of the site in the technical room.

Caution
Never stay or circulate under the load.
Do not stay below people working at height (risk of fall of objects).

[4] Installation Site

Keep the installation site clean and tidy for the


duration of the work.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
40 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12.3.4 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
document, use and communication of its contents not

The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.


CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT.
INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).

CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT.


INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND + BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)

CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION OR


INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND + BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)

The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:

labels that are affixed to 9400AWY hardware components:


dangerous electrical voltages
equipment connection to earth
microwave radiations

labels affixed to other equipments that can be found in the same 9400AWY premises:
risk of explosion
harmful optical signals
moving mechanical parts
heatradiating Mechanical Parts

Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed

The symbols presented in para.12.3.5 through 12.3.10 are all the possible symbols
that could be present on AlcatelLucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present
on the equipment this handbook refers to.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 41 / 866
12.3.5 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


[1] Electrical safety: Labelling

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
This warning label is affixed next to
dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc):

WARNING !
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to
mains, then the label associated to it states Ground protect the equipment before
that the equipment has to be grounded connecting it to the mains
before connecting it to the power supply Make sure that power has been cut off before
voltage, e.g.: disconnecting ground protection.

[2] Electrical safety: general rules

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
D.C.. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:

a) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V DC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any
exposed part of your body.

b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can
result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

12.3.6 Equipment connection to earth

Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be


done according to international safety standards, terminal
are pointed out by the suitable symbol: symbol

Information for earth connection terminals is specified in:

Chapter 13 on pages 55 , 57 , 58
Chapter 14 on pages 62
Chapter 15 on page 80
Chapter 16 on pages 150 , 153 , 157 , 166 , 181
Chapter 17 on page 191

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
42 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12.3.7 EMF safety instructions (microwave radiations)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

12.3.7.1 Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure)


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.

The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:

Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general
public.

Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.

Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance
boundaries.

Assure good cable connection.

Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the
cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the
transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than
2 meters high).

Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.

Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9400AWY antenna may cause traffic
shutdown.

12.3.7.2 EMF sticker positioning

Place the relevant stickers:

On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation)
Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis

On the mast (front side)


EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of
antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
EMF emission
installation)
warning sign

On the antenna (rear side)


EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 43 / 866
12.3.7.3 Compliance boundaries

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury for RF power emission.


While working on antenna pole where other antennas are present, do not stand on the
antenna axis, and be aware of the compliance boundaries defined for the systems they
are connected to.

If 9400AWYs ODU is powered on from IDU, do not stand on the antenna axis and be aware of the
specific compliance boundaries defined in Tab. 1. below, valid for following 9400AWY system
configurations:

a) 1+0 with 1ft. integrated antenna


b) 1+1 HSB with coupler and 1ft. integrated antenna
c) configuration with separated 1ft. antenna

N.B. these are the worst cases (lower frequencies, 4QAM, and smallest antenna). Respecting these
boundaries also for other better cases (higher frequencies, 16QAM, and largest antenna)
ensures your safety.

Tab. 1. Compliance boundaries for 9400AWY 1ft (30 cm) antenna:

System Modulation Worst Configuration A (m) B (m)

1+0 with integrated antenna


9413 AWY 4 QAM 0,4 2,63
(13 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna)

1+0 with integrated antenna


9415 AWY 4 QAM 0,4 0,55
(15 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna)

1+0 with integrated antenna


9418 AWY 4 QAM 0,4 0,71
(18 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
44 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12.3.8 Risks of Explosions: labelling and safety instructions
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This risk is usually present when batteries are


used, and it is signalled by the following label:

The openings made in the unit containing the battery must not be covered up to let dangerous gases
flow out in case of heating or burning.

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air


circulate freely and allow dangerous gases to
down flow (batteryemitted hydrogen). A
417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed
next to it indicating that the openings must not be
covered up.

12.3.9 Moving Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions

The following warning label is affixed next to fans


or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation, verify that all the moving mechanical parts have
been stopped.

12.3.10 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts: labelling and safety instructions

The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts


is indicated by the following warning label in
compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific


procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:

Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 45 / 866
12.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,

document, use and communication of its contents not


grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related parts of this Manual or other Handbooks, in particular:

Installation: Installation Handbook (part A of this User Manual, from page 23 )


Commissioning: Chapter 42 on page 675
Maintenance: Section 5: Maintenance and Upgrade on page 737

The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:

ATTENTION EMC NORMS

12.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation

All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation,
or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

12.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation

Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility


Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given

12.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance

Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
46 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
12.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges (ESD norms)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

Most electronic devices are sensitive to


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

electrostatic discharges, to this concern the


following warning labels have been affixed:

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.

Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of (see Fig. 1. on page 4):

an elasticized band worn around the wrist

a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.

12.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes in this handbook are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:

TITLE...

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


statement....

12.7 9400AWY equipmentspecific identification labels

Following paragraphs indicates the positions and the information contained on the 9400AWY
equipmentspecific identification labels:

Labels affixed on the IDU: para.15.1 on page 70

Labels affixed on the Flash Card: Fig. 179. on page 406

Labels affixed on the ODU: para.16.2.3 on page 148

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 47 / 866
48 / 866
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
13 RACK INSTALLATION AND GROUNDING
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

The IDU components making up one 9400AWY NE can be installed:

in a ETSI (WTD) rack (21) and North American standard rack (19)

in a Laborack (19)

with some equipment limitations, on the wall, through a specific wall mounting kit.

This chapter deals with the procedures for the installation and grounding of the above stated racks and
mounting kit:

Subject On page

Safety rules for rack positioning and fastening 50

ETSI Rack installation and grounding


50
For ETSI (WTD) rack (21), and North American standard rack (19)

Laborack installation and grounding


56
For 19 Laborack

Wall mounting kit description 58

N.B.

missing P/Ns of items described in this chapter are given in point a ) of Tab. 11. on page 243

the procedures for fixing IDU units to the rack are explained in chapter 15 from page 69

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 49 / 866
13.1 Safety rules for rack positioning and fastening

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during


movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Rack equipment weight exceeds 50 Kg.


Use materialhandling equipment to lift equipment.

13.2 ETSI Rack installation and grounding

Installation has been subdivided into the following phases:

Rack Positioning and Fastening

Fixing the rack to floor using expansion bolts or Fixing to floating floor

Rack grounding.

13.2.1 ETSI Rack positioning and fastening

Proceed as follows:

Refer to the plant documentation to see rack row assignment

Fasten the rack to the station structure according to one of the following procedures:

fixing the rack to floor, proceed with para.13.2.2 below

fixing the rack to floating floor, proceed with para.13.2.3 on page 53.

13.2.2 ETSI Rack fixing the rack using expansion bolts

See Fig. 2. on page 51 and Fig. 3. on page 52

1) Mount the rack in a vertical position in the desired place

2) Mark the baseplate with six holes (1) to be drilled on the floor

3) Temporarily remove the rack and drill the holes at the points drawn on the floor (see Fig. 3.
on page 52 )

4) Place the inserts into the holes

5) Secure the expander bolts to the floor through the baseplate holes.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
50 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

20

EXPANSION ANCHOR M8xM40

NOTES:
All dimensions are in mm
* Fixable max thickness
12** ** Diameter drill

Fig. 2. Fixing the rack using expansion bolts

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 51 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
142 mm
30 mm
30 mm
98 mm

149 mm 300 mm 149 mm

DRILL HOLES

Fig. 3. Drill Holes for Anchoring to the Floor (single rack)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
52 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
13.2.3 ETSI Rack fixing to floating floor
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The drilling mask is the same used for concrete floor fastening (Fig. 3. on page 52). In this case must be
document, use and communication of its contents not

create a hole for the cables coming from the bottom according to Fig. 4. below. The rack fastening is to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

be realized on the concrete floor below using a suitable stud as shown in Fig. 5. on page 54.

Using the row layout drawing, mark out the cable entry areas in the floor tiles and cut out with a jigsaw.
Remember that the beginning of the row will be agreed with the customer.

N.B. Unused or incompletely used cable entry areas should be blocked off with foam rubber.

598
149 300 149

61.25
96.25
CABLE ENTRY 35
AREA
30
130
30 297.25
35

80
106 81
FIBER DUCTS

26

Fig. 4. Floor tile drilling template

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 53 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
HEX NUT

LOCKWASHER

FLAT WASHER
BOTTOM
FRAME

STUD

Rack base
FLAT WASHER
LOCKWASHER
HEX NUT
Computer Floor

STUD
HEX NUT

LOCKWASHER Concrete Floor

FLAT WASHER

EXPANSION PLUG

Fig. 5. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
54 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
13.2.4 ETSI Rack grounding
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The rack must be grounded by means of a connection to the protection ground terminal of the site electrical
document, use and communication of its contents not

plant. protection ground terminal of the site electrical plant.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

SAFETY RULES
The rack must be connected to the protection ground before performing any
other electrical connection.

Fig. 6. shows the connection of the ground on the topside of the ETSI rack.

The rack is grounded to the station through a 16 to 25 mm2 (1 to 2 AWG) section cable (1) terminated
onto the cable terminal lug (2).

Insert and crimp the cable

2 1

Fig. 6. ETSI Rack Ground connections

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 55 / 866
13.3 Laborack installation and grounding

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
13.3.1 Laborack installation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 7. Laborack

The Laborack must be fixed to the floor by means the four (4) screws.
(For more information see the manufacturer instructions)

When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19 unit, the front panel will hold the
equipment by four screws fitted into the Laborack cage nuts.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
56 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
13.3.2 Laborack grounding
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The Laborack must be grounded by means of a connection to the protection ground terminal of the site
document, use and communication of its contents not

electrical plant.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

SAFETY RULES
The Laborack must be connected to the protection ground before performing
any other electrical connection.

Fig. 8. shows the connection of the ground on the bottom side of the Laborack.

Fig. 8. Laborack Ground connections

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 57 / 866
13.4 Wall mounting kit description

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


The mechanical support (kit ref. 3CC09614AAAA) can be used for wall installation and it can support a

document, use and communication of its contents not


maximum of three units.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


The kit includes:
Two brackets
Four fixing for the brackets
M6x50 socket cap screws
Onduflex washers
Expansion bolt
The mechanical support can contain a maximum of ONE unit in case of system 1+0 and TWO units in
case of system 1+1, both equipped with mini distributor.
The possible installations are the followings:
1+0 and 1+1 Installation wall with and without mini distributor
1+0 and 1+1 typical wall installation (horizontal and vertical positioning)
The wooden or masonry wall that is selected for the installation should be in a suitable portion of the room.
Preferably it should be near to a safety power outlet, and it should ensure safeguard against accidental
tampering. It is possible to install the apparatus in a horizontal or vertical position

Detail A

Detail A

Grounding
point

The mechanical support must be grounded using the Grounding Kit 3CC13423AAAA

Fig. 9. Fixing the mechanical support to the wall and grounding

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
58 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
14 TOP RACK UNIT (TRU) INSTALLATION AND CABLING
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter deals with:

SUBJECT ON PAGE

General installation rules 60

Introduction to Top Rack Unit 61

Top Rack Unit components 61

Top Rack Unit installation and cabling steps 62

Power Supply installation kit 64

Types and section of cables for grounding and power supply 67

N.B. missing P/Ns of items described in this chapter are given in Tab. 11. :

point b ) on page 243 (TRU components)

point i ) on page 246 (power supply and grounding cables)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 59 / 866
14.1 General installation rules

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


SAFETY RULES

If not yet done, read chapter 12 from page 35 , and point iii on page 4 , which describe the
operations and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating personnel during the working
phases, and to guarantee equipment safety.
Read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipment.

After performing the TRU mechanical installation, perform the TRU ground connection.

Before performing any electrical connection operation, make sure that the power supply circuit
breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.

Before performing any electrical connection operation from TRU to any subrack, make sure that the
correspondent TRU power supply circuit breaker is turned OFF.

In case of expansions, to carry out any new electrical connection from the TRU to a new shelf:

position the TRUtoshelf power supply cables and connect them only to the TRUs
correspondent circuit breaker, without connecting them to the new shelf

turn ON the new circuit breakers and verify the correct polarity and quality connection on it, on
the connector at new shelf side

turn OFF such new circuit breakers

connect the power supply cables to the new NEs connectors, and screw them

power ON the new circuit breakers and check for few minutes if is there any anomalies
condition.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
60 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
14.2 Introduction to Top Rack Unit
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The Top Rack Unit (TRU) is positioned on the top of the Rack and it is used to provide the Power Supply
document, use and communication of its contents not

to the equipment.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Rear view (with sliding cover)


Front view (with cover)
Fig. 10. Top Rack Unit views

14.3 Top Rack Unit components

Component description Quantity Particular view

Terminal Block 16mm2 2

Thermal Magnetic Circuit


6
Breaker Unipolar

Bus Bar Supply to 12 Fuse Carrier 1

Screws M6x16 with plastic Washer 4

Natched Clamp Nuts M6 4

Rail + Front 19 1

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 61 / 866
14.4 Top Rack Unit installation and cabling steps

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


[1] TRU installation

document, use and communication of its contents not


The TRU is fixed to the 19 rack by means of two screws:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Fig. 11. Top Rack Unit installation in the rack

N.B. In case of installation in a 21 rack, use the specific 19 / 21 adapter kit P/N
3CC50042AAAA, which contains two adapters as that shown below, besides mounting
materials:

(3CC5034AAAA)

[2] TRU grounding


As shown in Fig. 12. , the TRU must be grounded by means of a connection to the rack, which, in
turn, is connected to the protection ground terminal of the site electrical plant.
SAFETY RULES
The TRU must be connected to the protection ground before performing any
other electrical connection.

Fig. 12. Top Rack Unit grounding to the rack

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
62 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[3] Connection of the TRU to the plant power supply
SAFETY RULES
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Before performing this electrical connection operation, make sure that the
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

power supply circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.

N.B. For the section of cables to use, refer to para.14.6 on page 67

POSITIVE (brown) NEGATIVE (blue) ELECTRICAL GROUND


(yellowgreen)

from plant power supply

Fig. 13. Top Rack Unit connection to the plant power supply

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 63 / 866
14.5 Power Supply installation kit

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


This paragraph describes the Power Supply Kit and the assembly of the connector with / without the EMI

document, use and communication of its contents not


suppression ferrite.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


The Power Supply Kit allows to prepare the power supply cables necessary for each IDU MAIN unit, and
for each IDU EXTENSION unit, powered through the TRU.

14.5.1 Kit components

Power Supply Kit code: 3CC52136AAAA

In an antistatic bag there is the following material:

1AB006030115

1AD016580003

1AB040970046

EMI Suppression FERRITE with plastic case , necessary only with full range IDU units (2460 Vdc)

1AB093970004

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
64 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
14.5.2 Assembly procedure
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

For the section of cables to use, refer to para.14.6 on page 67


document, use and communication of its contents not

The cable length must be defined according to the position of the IDU MAIN / EXTENSION unit in the rack.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

blue

yellowgreen
connect the cables wires to the connector
brown
+

position the cable into the shell

close the cover of the shell and fix with the screw

Following operations are necessary only with full range IDU units (2460 Vdc)

position the ferrite with plastic case near the shell and
fix the two wrappers

close the ferrite with plastic case

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 65 / 866
14.5.3 Steps for the connection to the TRU of the power supply cables

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


The cables are used in step [8] of the IDU installation and cabling procedure, on page 82

document, use and communication of its contents not


SAFETY RULES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Before performing this electrical connection operation, make sure that the
power supply circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.

[1] Cable positioning inside the TRU trail (rear side)

[2] Cable connection to the TRU (front side)

NEGATIVE
POSITIVE Blue wire ELECTRICAL GROUND
Brown wire Yellowgreen wire

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
66 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
14.6 Types and section of cables for grounding and power supply
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

System
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

AWY 1+0 AWY 1+1

Cable type & section Cable type & section


Cable usage (for cable length (for cable length
up to 20 m) up to 20 m)

Grounding cables

Cable for grounding the RACK to the protection


ground terminal of the site electrical plant.
See: 1 x  16 mm2 1 x  16 mm2
Fig. 6. on page 55
Fig. 8. on page 57

Cable for grounding the TRU to the RACK.


1 x  16 mm2 1 x  16 mm2
See Fig. 12. on page 62

Cable for grounding the IDU MAIN / EXTENSION unit


to the RACK (if necessary). 1 x 3 mm2 1 x 3 mm2
See Fig. 20. on page 80

Power supply cables

Cable for TRU power supply from plant power supply.


2 x ( 1 x 16 mm2 ) 2 x ( 1 x 16 mm2 )
See Fig. 13. on page 63

Cable for IDU MAIN / EXTENSION units power supply


from TRU.
See para.14.5.2 on page 65

Cable for Power Supply 4860 Vdc 3 x 1.5 mm2 3 x 1.5 mm2

Cable for Power Supply 2460 Vdc 3 x 2.5 mm2 3 x 2.5 mm2

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 67 / 866
68 / 866
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
15 INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION AND CABLING
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter deals with:

Subject On page

Labels affixed on the IDU Main and Extension units 70

Installation and cabling of IDU components 71

Composition, installation and cabling rules for IDU components


This paragraph is mainly useful in case you must perform the IDU
71
installation and cabling without having a reference plantdependent
documentation

Suggested IDU installation and cabling procedure


This paragraph describes in detail how to install and cable the IDU 75
components.

IDU configuration types and cabling


This paragraph describes the hardware components (shelves, cables, and
101
how to connect them) of one single 9400AWY NE according to the most
common system configurations envisaged.

IDU horizontal and vertical installation


This paragraph describes the rules for the horizontal or vertical installation of 133
one or more 9400AWY NEs in one rack.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 69 / 866
15.1 Labels affixed on the IDU Main and Extension units

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


This label is affixed on the back side of the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION unit:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
example IDU MAIN unit

A C
B
this label is just an example
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
9400AWY Equipment Acronym & Alcatel or AlcatelLucent Logo
CE European Community logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment) Logo (see para.22.10.3 on page 399)

Electrostatic Device Logo


Logistical item 3DB 05620 AAXX (example) Logistical item for Customer
A Logistical item for Customer, bar code 128
P/N ICS 3DB 05620 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS
B Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128
SERIAL N CW052402145 (example)
Factory serial number
SERIAL N CW052402141 (example)
C Factory serial number bar code 128
24 V 20%, 2.2 A max (example) Power Supply Version 24 V
4860 V 20%, 1.10.7 A (example) Power Supply Version 48/60 V
2460 V 20%, 2.20.7 A (example) Power Supply Version Full Range
Feeding to Continuous Current

Fig. 14. Label affixed on the IDU Main and Extension units

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
70 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.2 Installation and cabling of IDU components
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

15.2.1 Composition, installation and cabling rules for IDU components


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

[1] IDU composition according to NE configuration


The IDU components making up one 9400AWY NE are:
one IDU MAIN unit, always present. Before its hardware installation, the Flash Card must be
inserted inside it, and the associated Software Label must be sticked on the IDU MAIN unit front
panel
one IDU EXTENSION unit, present in 1+1 configurations only
one E1 PROTECTION BOX and/or one SERVICE PROTECTION BOX, present or not,
depending on specific configurations. These boxes are installed in the rack by means of a
specific mechanical support
one or two E1 DISTRIBUTOR SHELVES, present or not, depending on specific configurations
signal interconnection cables, connecting IDU components to each other, and to the Customer
DDF and external lines
power supply cables: one for the IDU MAIN unit, and another one for the IDU EXTENSION unit,
if present in the configuration.
The IDU composition, according to NE configuration, is described in para.15.3 from page 101

[2] Terminology and synonyms

Synonym that can be found


Term used in this document
in other related documents
IDU Main (unit) Main (unit)
IDU Extension (unit) Spare (unit)
E1 Protection Box or Service Protection Box Patch Panel
E1 Protection Box Tributary Panel
Service Protection Box Auxiliary Service Panel

[3] IDU installation options


a) Housing rack
The IDU components stated above can be installed:
in an ETSI (WTD) rack (21)
in a Laborack (19)
in a North American standard rack (19)
with some equipment limitations, on the wall, through a specific wall mounting kit.
For each type of installation, special mechanical supporting fixtures are available.
b) Horizontal or vertical installation, and relative position
The IDU components stated above can be installed horizontally or vertically in the rack, as
described in para.15.4 from page 133 . This same paragraph specifies the relative position of
slots to be employed for the IDU MAIN unit, the IDU EXTENSION unit, the PROTECTION
BOXES, and the E1 DISTRIBUTOR SHELVES (DDF).

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 71 / 866
[4] IDU shelf components installation positions and installation sequence

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


With reference to the IDU shelf components, defined by each one of the various configurations

document, use and communication of its contents not


described in para.15.3 from page 101 , following Fig. 15. (for 1+0 systems) and Fig. 16. (for 1+1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


systems) :

depict the exact (mandatory) relative position of shelves

by numbers in brackets [ (1) , (2) , (3) , (4) ] , specify the exact (mandatory) order for the
installation of the IDU shelf components

N.B. for mounting the protection box(es), two types of support kits are available, according to
the configuration, as depicted in Fig. 21. on page 81

Detailed instructions for the shelf installation are given in para.15.2.2 from page 75

N.B. For ease of operation, in case the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(s) is / are present in the
configuration, it is preferable to make its / their final installation after having positioned the
signal cables.

1+0 WITH NEITHER PROTECTION BOX(ES) NOR DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

(1) MAIN

1+0 WITHOUT SERVICE PROTECTION BOX & WITH DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

Distributor Subrack (1U example) (2)

(1) MAIN

1+0 WITH SERVICE PROTECTION BOX & WITHOUT DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

(2) Service Protection Box on support

(1) MAIN

1+0 WITH SERVICE PROTECTION BOX AND DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

Distributor Subrack (1U example) (3)

(2) Service Protection Box on support

(1) MAIN

Fig. 15. IDU shelf components installation positions and installation sequence (1+0 systems)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
72 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
1+1 WITH NEITHER PROTECTION BOX(ES) NOR DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

(2) MAIN
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

(1) EXTENSION

1+1 WITHOUT PROTECTION BOX(ES) & WITH DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

Distributor Subrack (1U example) (3)

(2) MAIN

(1) EXTENSION

1+1 WITH SERVICE PROTECTION BOX ONLY, AND WITHOUT DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

(3) Service Protection Box on support

(2) MAIN

(1) EXTENSION

1+1 WITH SERVICE PROTECTION BOX ONLY, AND WITH DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

Distributor Subrack (1U example) (4)

(3) Service Protection Box on support

(2) MAIN

(1) EXTENSION

1+1 WITH E1 & SERVICE PROTECTION BOXES, AND WITHOUT DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

(3) Protection Boxes on support

(2) MAIN

(1) EXTENSION

1+1 WITH E1 & SERVICE PROTECTION BOXES, AND WITH DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(S)

Distributor Subrack (1U example) (4)

(3) Protection Boxes on support

(2) MAIN

(1) EXTENSION

Fig. 16. IDU shelf components installation positions and installation sequence (1+1 systems)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 73 / 866
[5] Cable labelling

For installation, service and maintenance purposes, the following cables must be uniquely identified:

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
by two labels (with the same identification data) placed at its two ends:
cables for IDU unit grounding to the rack (if done, see step [5] on page 80 )
cables for IDU unit power supply (see step [8] on page 82 )

by various labels (with different identification data):


cables connecting IDU to Customer DDF (see step [9] on page 83 )

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
74 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.2.2 Suggested IDU installation and cabling procedure
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Step summary:
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

step from page

SAFETY RULES:
If not yet done, read chapter 12 from page 35 , and point iii on
page 4 , which describe the operations and/or precautions to be
observed to safeguard operating personnel during the working
phases, and to guarantee equipment safety. Read them with
accuracy before to start every action on the equipment.

In case you must perform the IDU installation and cabling without
having a reference plantdependent documentation, read
71
Composition, installation and cabling rules for IDU
components, and carefully observe given statements

Checks before starting installation 76

Tightening torque 76

Insertion of the Flash Card in the IDU MAIN unit 77

Installation of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU EXTENSION unit (if present
79
in the configuration)

Optional grounding of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU EXTENSION unit (if
80
present in the configuration)

Assembling and installation of the PROTECTION BOXES (if present in the


81
configuration)

Interconnection of IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units (only for 1+1 systems) 82

Connection of power supply cable to the IDU MAIN unit, and to the IDU
82
EXTENSION unit (if present in the configuration)

Preparation of cables for connection of IDU to Customer DDF (if present in the
83
configuration)

Installation of the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS (if present in the configuration) 95

Positioning and connection of signal cables (according to system


96
configuration)

N.B. refer to the plant documentation (or any other Customer site plan), for the connection of the
Ethernet cables:

from IDU MAIN units RJ45 OS connector [Ref. (3) in Fig. 143. on page 289 ] to the OS,
(if this connection is envisaged)

from IDU MAIN unit 4 x RJ45 Ethernet user data connectors [Ref. (5) in Fig. 143. on page
289 ], to Ethernet network (only when Enhanced Ethernet plugin is equipped)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 75 / 866
[1] Checks before starting installation

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Before to start the installation of the IDU components, verify:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


that the installation and grounding of the rack, or wall mounting kit, have already been
performed: see Chapter 13 from page 49
in case of installation in a rack:
that the installation and cabling of the TRU have already been performed: see Chapter 14
on pages 59 to 63
that the power supply cable(s) for the IDU MAIN (and EXTENSION, if present in the
configuration) unit(s) has (have) already been prepared and connected to the TRU: see
para.14.5 on pages 64 to 66
that in the rack there is the available room for the NE components installation, according
to the NE configuration
that you have all necessary material, according to the NE configuration
that you own plant data to connect the 9400AWY NE IDU to the Customer DDF and external
lines.

[2] Screw tightening torque


In all described operations (fixing subracks to the rack, fixing cables to connectors,
etc.), and unless differently specified, the screw tightening torque must be as stated
in point c ) on page 4

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
76 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[3] Insertion of the Flash Card in the IDU MAIN unit (rear side)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

General
document, use and communication of its contents not

The Flash Card shipping packing includes the Flash Card itself, in dedicated packing composed of
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

two parts (inner and outer clamshell).


The Flash Card, which has an identification label affixed on it, is inside the inner clamshell; these two
parts are inside the outer clamshell, and in this part is present also the booklet shown below, and the
3rd Flash Card label, used in following step 7 ). The label with Logistical item of the Flash Card and
the Flash Card label are affixed in this booklet,
The labels are described in Fig. 179. on page 406 .

Fig. 17. Flash Card booklet with areas for the label

Insertion procedure

1) Remove the Flash Card cover

Flash Card slot

Flash Card cover

2) Wear the antistatic protection armlet [see point b ) on page 4 ] and connect its termination to
a grounded structure
ATTENTION

(caution to avoid equipment damage)


this avoids the possible damage of the Flash Card for electrostatic discharges

3) Extract the Flash Card from its clamshell

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 77 / 866
4) Insert the Flash Card:

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


CONNECTOR SIDE

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
INSERTION BOTTOM SIDE

5) Restore the Flash Card cover

6) Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet

7) The Flash Card shipping packing contains another selfadhesive label, equal to that affixed on
the Flash Card itself.
As shown below, cut and stick it on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit:
flash card
Licence String

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
78 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[4] Installation of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU EXTENSION unit (if present in the
configuration)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

Special mechanical fittings are provided, depending to the width of rack (19 or 21).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

The mechanical fittings for installation in in a 19 or 21 ETSI rack are shown in the assembly drawing
of Fig. 18. below

IDU ADAPTER FOR 19 Rack (3DB04834AAAA, default delivery)

IDU ADAPTER FOR 21 Rack (3DB18181AAAA)

Fig. 18. IDU unit with adapter for installation in 19 rack

The installation in in a 19 Laborack is shown in Fig. 19. : fasten the IDU units to the rack by inserting
screws into holes of 19 mechanical adaptors and by screwing them into relevant holes provided with
nut cage situated on rack brackets

Screw hole Nut cage


Fig. 19. IDU unit installation in Laborack

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 79 / 866
[5] Optional grounding of the IDU MAIN unit, and of the IDU EXTENSION unit (if present in the
configuration)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
If the installation is made:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


in one of the the rack types listed in point a ) on page 243 ,
and by means of the mechanical adapters shown on page 79 ,
there is no need to ground the IDU MAIN / EXTENSION units, because their fastening to the rack
guarantees the connection to the protection ground, in that the rack is wired to the station protection
ground.
In case you use another type of rack or another type of mechanical adapters, for which the subrack
mechanical fastening does not guarantee a good subracktorack electrical contact, it is necessary
to ground each IDU unit to the rack, using the Faston connector present on the rear side of the unit,
as shown in following Fig. 20.
The section of the Yellow/Green cable (wire) to use must be 1 x 3 mm2 (12AWG)

Fig. 20. IDU unit grounding (if necessary)


Label the cable at both ends:

Link ID Main Ground Link ID Extension Ground

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
80 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[6] Assembling and installation of the PROTECTION BOXES (if present in the configuration)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

1) Perform assembly as depicted in Fig. 21. : in case of KIT 3DB16151AAAA, notice that the E1
document, use and communication of its contents not

PROTECTION BOX must be on the left, and the SERVICE PROTECTION BOX must be on the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

right
CASE OF KIT 3DB16151AAAA
E1 PROTECTION BOX
SERVICE PROTECTION BOX

equipment side connectors line side connectors

Support (belonging to kit P/N 3DB16151AAAA)

CASE OF KIT 3DB16151ABAA


SERVICE PROTECTION BOX SERVICE PROTECTION BOX
line side connectors line side connectors

Support (belonging to kit P/N 3DB16151ABAA)


N.B. The use of two Service Protection Boxes on the same support is explained in para.18.3.4
on page 212

Fig. 21. Assembling the PROTECTION BOXES on the 19 support

2) fix the assembly to the 19 rack.


N.B. In case of installation in a 21 rack, use the specific 19 / 21 adapter kit (P/N
3DB16152AAAA), which contains two adapters as that shown below, besides
mounting materials:

(3DB16144AAA)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 81 / 866
[7] Interconnection of IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units (only for 1+1 systems)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
[8] Connection of power supply cable to the IDU MAIN unit, and to the IDU EXTENSION unit (if
present in the configuration)

SAFETY RULES
Before performing this cabling operation, make sure that:

the power supply circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.
the ON/OFF switch of the:
IDU MAIN unit ; Ref. (2) in Fig. 143. on page 289
IDU EXTENSION unit (if present in the configuration); Ref. (2) in Fig. 145.
on page 294
is (are) in OFF position:

0 OFF

The power supply cable should have already been prepared and connected to the TRU, as explained
in para.14.5.3 on page 66 . If not yet done, label the cable at both ends:

Link ID 48V Main Link ID 48V Extension

Now, connect and fix the power supply cables connector on the IDU unit connector:

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
82 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[9] Preparation of cables for connection of IDU to Customer DDF (if present in the configuration)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

a) Introduction
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Need for this preparation

Typical example station layouts, requiring this preparation for all the connections from IDU
to the Customer DDF are shown on pages 103 and 108

Other station layouts require this preparation only for some connections from IDU to the
Customer DDF, as shown in examples on pages 104 and 118

Cable unsheathing

Cables used to connect IDU to Customer DDF are supplied by AlcatelLucent with one
end unterminated, as in this example:

unterminated end

The unterminated end must be unsheathed by the installer.

Twisted pair identification

Wires to be connected to Customer DDF are twisted pairs uniquely identified by pair of
colors, as in this example:

YellowBlue pair

WhiteBrown pair

To identify the correspondence between twisted pairs colors and the carried signals, you
must use together:
the pinout of the IDU connector, which the cable is connected to (this gives you the
signals present on each pin of the connector)
and, starting from the P/N of the used cable, the specific CONNECTION CABLE
documented in chapter 113 from page 327

Connector labelling, and twisted pair tieing and labelling

For installation, service and maintenance purposes, before connecting the cable to IDU
and to DDF:
at connector side, the cable should be labelled with the IDU connector name
at DDF side, twisted pairs should be grouped, tied, and labelled according to:
the carried signals,
and the DDF structure.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 83 / 866
Suggested detailed instructions for the preparation of cables are given on following pages:

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Cable type On page

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
From IDU MAIN unit to Customer DDF

116 E1 tributary cable 85

1732 E1 tributary cable 86

ALMNMS cable (note) 87

AUDIOUSER SERV cable 89

From Service Protection Box to Customer DDF (note)

ALM cable 91

NMS V11AUDIO1 cable 92

NMS G703AUDIO2 cable 93

ESC cable 94

note: This description is given for information completion.


Take into account that, in case of network interconnections for NMS channel and
EOW audio continuity, the connections on the connectors:
ALMNMS of the IDU MAIN unit
and of the Service Protection Box
must be done as specified in Chapter 18 from page 195

In each connection table:

P1 .. Px specify the pair number, according to the specific CONNECTION CABLE


documented in chapter 113 from page 327 ,

numbers specify the pin numbers (according to the specific IDU connector used),

and color is the color of the wire.

N.B. Obviously, you must prepare only the cables present in the specific NE configuration.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
84 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
b) Preparation of 116 E1 tributary cable from IDU MAIN to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.1 on page 103 :
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

pinout of IDU connector 116 E1 as in Tab. 63. on page 307


document, use and communication of its contents not

CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3CC52117ABAA as in para.113.5 on page 333


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

DDF organized in Tx and Rx, by 8 pair groups


Combining this information, the result is:

CABLE N 1 (Tx) Tx 18
Tx 916

Link ID I/O (116) CABLE N 2 (Rx) Rx 18


Rx 916

CABLE N5 1: Tx 1 to 8
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
2 36 4 38 6 40 8 42 10 44 12 46 14 48 16 50
white blue white orange white green white brown white grey yellow blue yellow orange yellow green

Labelling: Link ID Tx Trib 1 to 8

CABLE N5 1: Tx 9 to 16
P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16
18 52 20 54 22 56 24 58 26 60 28 62 30 64 32 66
yellow brown yellow grey violet blue violet orange violet green violet brown violet grey black blue

Labelling: Link ID Tx Trib 9 to 16

CABLE N5 2: Rx 1 to 8
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
3 37 5 39 7 41 9 43 11 45 13 47 15 49 17 51
white blue white orange white green white brown white grey yellow blue yellow orange yellow green

Labelling: Link ID Rx Trib 1 to 8

CABLE N5 2: Rx 9 to 16
P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16
19 53 21 55 23 57 25 59 27 61 29 63 31 65 33 67
yellow brown yellow grey violet blue violet orange violet green violet brown violet grey black blue

Labelling: Link ID Rx Trib 9 to 16

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 85 / 866
c) Preparation of 1732 E1 tributary cable from IDU MAIN to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.5 on page 108 :

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


pinout of IDU connector 1732 E1 as in Tab. 64. on page 309

document, use and communication of its contents not


CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3CC52117ABAA as in para.113.5 on page 333

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


DDF organized in Tx and Rx, by 8 pair groups
Combining this information, the result is:

Tx 1724
Tx 2532
CABLE N 1 (Tx)
Link ID I/O (1732)
Rx 1724
Rx 2532
CABLE N 2 (Rx)

CABLE N5 1: Tx 17 to 24
P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24
2 36 4 38 6 40 8 42 10 44 12 46 14 48 16 50
white blue white orange white green white brown white grey yellow blue yellow orange yellow green

Labelling: Link ID Tx Trib 17 to 24

CABLE N5 1: Tx 25 to 32
P25 P25 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32
18 52 20 54 22 56 24 58 26 60 28 62 30 64 32 66
yellow brown yellow grey violet blue violet orange violet green violet brown violet grey black blue

Labelling: Link ID Tx Trib 25 to 32

CABLE N5 2: Rx 17 to 24
P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24
3 37 5 39 7 41 9 43 11 45 13 47 15 49 17 51
white blue white orange white green white brown white grey yellow blue yellow orange yellow green

Labelling: Link ID Rx Trib 17 to 24

CABLE N5 2: Rx 25 to 32
P25 P25 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32
19 53 21 55 23 57 25 59 27 61 29 63 31 65 33 67
yellow brown yellow grey violet blue violet orange violet green violet brown violet grey black blue

Labelling: Link ID Rx Trib 25 to 32

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
86 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
d) Preparation of ALMNMS cable from IDU MAIN to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.1 on page 103 :
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

pinout of IDU connector ALMNMS as in Tab. 65. on page 311


document, use and communication of its contents not

explanations on:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Alarms and Housekeeping signals, from page 317


NMS V11 signals, from page 322
NMS G703 signals, from page 323
CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3CC52115ABAA as in para.113.3 on page 331
Combining this information, the result is:

AlarmsHousekeeping
NMS V11+G703

Link ID ALMNMS

ALARMSHOUSEKEEPING

P5 P7 P8 P10 P14

9 12 13 14 15 30 10 11 25 26

GND A_1 COM_GND HK_I1 HK_I2 HK_I4 HK_O1 COM HK_O2 HK_O3

whitebl
blue orange yellow orange red orange white green black
ue

P15 P16 P21 P22

27 42 28 29 40 41 43 44

A_2 COM_GND COM_GND HK_I3 HK_O4 A_3 HK_I5 HK_I6

green whiteblue brown white grey white grey yellow

Labelling: Link ID AlarmsHousekeeping

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 87 / 866
NMS V11+G703

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


NMS V11

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
P10 P11
17 18 19 20
CC_RXP (V11) CC_RXN (V11) RX_CKN (V11) RX_CKP (V11)
(DATA RX +) (DATA RX ) (CLOCK CK) (CLOCK CK+)
orange whiteblue green white
P17 P18
32 33 34 35
CC_TXP (V11) CC_TXN (V11) CC_TCKP (V11) CC_TCKN (V11)
(DATA TX +) (DATA TX ) (CLOCK TCK+) (CLOCK TCK)
brown yellow brown red

NMS G703
P2 P3
2 3 4 5
COD_TXP (G703) COD_TXN (G703) COD_RXP (G703) COD_RXN (G703)
(G703_64K_TX+) (G703_64K_TX) (G703_64K_RX+) (G703_64K_RX)
blue yellow blue red

Labelling: Link ID NMS V11+G703

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
88 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
e) Preparation of AUDIOUSER SERV cable from IDU MAIN to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.1 on page 103 :
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

pinout of IDU connector AUDIOUSER SERV as in Tab. 66. on page 313


document, use and communication of its contents not

explanations on User service channels signals from page 324


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3CC52115ABAA as in para.113.3 on page 331


Combining this information, the result is:

User Service Channels Link ID AUDIOUSER SERV

Audio

USER SERVICE CHANNELS

G703
P2 P3
2 3 4 5
COD_TXP (G703) COD_TXN (G703) COD_RXP (G703) COD_RXN (G703)
blue yellow blue red

V11
P10 P11
17 18 19 20
CC_RXP (V11) CC_RXN (V11) RX_CKN (V11) RX_CKP (V11)
orange whiteblue green white
P17 P18
32 33 34 35
CC_TXP (V11) CC_TXN (V11) CC_TCKP (V11) CC_TCKN (V11)
brown yellow brown red

RS232
P4 P12
7 8 22 23
RX_ASY (RS232) GND TX_ASY (RS232) GND
blue black green yellow

Labelling: Link ID User Service Channels

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 89 / 866
AUDIO
N.B. meaningful only if the Audio + User Service Channel plugin is present in IDU MAIN unit

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
AUDIO 1
P6 P7
10 11 13 14
1WEOW_IN_P 1WEOW_IN_N 1WEOW_OUTP 1WEOW_OUT_N
(from user+) (from user) (to user+) (to user)
orange white orange yellow

AUDIO 2
P21 P22
40 41 43 44
2EEOW_IN_P 2EEOW_IN_N 2EEOW_OUTP 2EEOW_OUT_N
(from user+) (from user) (to user+) (to user)
grey white grey yellow

Labelling: Link ID Audio

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
90 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
f) Preparation of ALM cable from Service Protection Box to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.16 on page 125 :
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

pinout of Service Protection Box connector ALM as in Tab. 58. on page 302
document, use and communication of its contents not

explanations on Alarms and Housekeeping signals, from page 317


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3DB05594AAAA as in para.113.17 on page 348


Combining this information, the result is:

AlarmsHousekeeping
Link ID ALM

ALARMSHOUSEKEEPING

P1 P2 P3 P4
2 9 3 10 4 1 5 12
A_2 COM A_3 GND HK_O1 A_1 HK_O3 HK_O4
blue white violet turquoise orange white violet turquoise

P5 P6 P7 P8
6 13 7 14 8 15 11 not
HK_I1 HK_I2 HK_I3 HK_I4 HK_I5 HK_I6 HK_O2 connected
green white violet turquoise brown white violet turquoise

Labelling: Link ID AlarmsHousekeeping

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 91 / 866
g) Preparation of NMS V11AUDIO1 cable from Service Protection Box to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.16 on page 125 :

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


pinout of Service Protection Box connector NMS V11AUDIO1 as in Tab. 59. on page

document, use and communication of its contents not


303

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


explanations on NMS V11 Audio 1 signals, on page 322
CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3DB05594AAAA as in para.113.17 on page 348
Combining this information, the result is:

NMS V11

Link ID NMS V11AUDIO1


Audio 1

NMS V11

P1 P2 P3
2 9 3 10 4 1
RS422 clock in RS422 data in RS422 data RS422 clock in RS422 clock RS422 data in
(+) () out (+) () out (+) (+)
blue white violet turquoise orange white

P4 P8
5 12 11
not connected
GND NMS RS422 clock out () RS422 data out ()
violet turquoise violet turquoise

Labelling: Link ID NMS V11

AUDIO 1
N.B. meaningful only if the Audio + User Service Channel plugin is present in IDU MAIN unit

P5 P6 P7
6 13 7 14 8 15
Audio1 signal Audio1 signal Audio1 signal Audio1 signal
GND Audio Not used
from user (+) from user () to user (+) to user ()
green white violet turquoise brown white

Labelling: Link ID Audio 1

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
92 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
h) Preparation of NMS G703AUDIO2 cable from Service Protection Box to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.16 on page 125 :
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

pinout of Service Protection Box connector NMS G703AUDIO2 as in Tab. 60. on page
document, use and communication of its contents not

304
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

explanations on NMS G703 Audio 2 signals, on page 323


CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3DB05594AAAA as in para.113.17 on page 348
Combining this information, the result is:

NMS G703

Link ID NMS G703AUDIO2


Audio 2

NMS G703

P1 P2 P3
2 9 3 10 4 1
G703 data in G703 data out G703 data in
Not used Not used Not used
() (+) (+)
blue white violet turquoise orange white

P4 P8
5 12 11
not connected
GND NMS Not used G703 data out ()
violet turquoise violet turquoise

Labelling: Link ID NMS G703

AUDIO 2
N.B. meaningful only if the Audio + User Service Channel plugin is present in IDU MAIN unit

P5 P6 P7
6 13 7 14 8 15
Audio2 signal Audio2 signal Audio2 signal Audio2 signal
GND Audio Not used
from user (+) from user () to user (+) to user ()
green white violet turquoise brown white

Labelling: Link ID Audio 2

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 93 / 866
i) Preparation of ESC cable from Service Protection Box to Customer DDF
Example referred to configuration depicted in para.15.3.16 on page 125 :

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


pinout of Service Protection Box connector ESC as in Tab. 61. on page 305

document, use and communication of its contents not


explanations on User service channels signals from page 324

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


CONNECTION TABLE of cable P/N 3DB05594AAAA as in para.113.17 on page 348
Combining this information, the result is:

User Service Channels


Link ID ESC

USER SERVICE CHANNELS


N.B. meaningful only if the Audio + User Service Channel plugin is present in IDU MAIN unit

P1 P2 P3 P4

2 9 3 10 4 1 5 12

COD_RX + COD_RX COD_TX + COD_TX RX_ASY GND CC_RX + CC_RX

blue white violet turquoise orange white violet turquoise

P5 P6 P7 P8

6 13 7 14 8 15 11
not
RX_CK + RX_CK CC_TX + CC_TX CC_TCK + CC_TCK TX_ASY connected

green white violet turquoise brown white violet turquoise

Labelling: Link ID User Service Channels

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
94 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[10] Installation of the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS (if present in the configuration)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS are all 19 units, some 3U high, other 1U high. They are shown,
document, use and communication of its contents not

together with their P/Ns, in figures of point g ) from page 245


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. In case of installation in a 21 rack, use the specific 19 / 21 adapter kit; in case of:

3U high subrack, use the kit P/N 3CC50042AAAA, which contains two adapters as
that shown below, besides mounting materials:

(3CC5034AAAA)

1U high subrack, use the kit P/N 3CC50065AAAA, which contains two adapters as
that shown below, besides mounting materials:

(3CC50066AAAA)

75 W DDF support 120 W DDF support

Suggestion: for ease of cable positioning, in particular with ETSI rack (with unremovable back
cover), make a temporary installation of the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(s), position and connect the
signal cables (as specified in next step [11] ), and, at last, fix the DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK(s) in
its / their definitive position.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 95 / 866
[11] Positioning and connection of signal cables (according to system configuration)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


General cabling rules

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
The cables must be positioned in such a way:

caution to avoid equipment damage

to avoid their possible damage (e.g. avoiding excessive bending or connector forcing)

to allow easy extraction of IDU MAIN / EXTENSION units, for service and maintenance purpose

General connection rules

cables terminated by connectors at both sides must be connected to IDU units as depicted in
the connection diagram relevant to the specific NE configuration (*)

cables from IDU to DDF must have already been prepared (see step [9] from page 83 ), and
must be connected:
to IDU units, as depicted in the connection diagram relevant to the specific NE
configuration (*)
at DDF side, according to the specific plant documentation

(*) NE configurations and relevant connection diagrams are described in para.15.3 from
page 101

Positioning and connection examples

In the following, some examples of signal cables positioning and connection are depicted:

Base configuration Protection boxes Distributor subrack(s) on page

1+0 NO NO 97

NO NO 97

YES NO 98
1+1
NO YES 99

YES YES 100

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
96 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
a) 1+0 configuration without protection boxes, and with no distributor subrack
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

b) 1+1 configuration without protection boxes, and with no distributor subrack

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 97 / 866
c) 1+1 configuration with protection boxes, and with no distributor subrack

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


For easy installation, insert the ALMNMS cable and, if present, the AUDIOUSER

document, use and communication of its contents not


SERV cable, between the MAIN IDU and the right side of the Service Protection Box:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


For easy installation, insert the E1 TRIBUTARY cable(s) between the MAIN IDU and the
left side of the E1 Protection Box:

Do not bend these cables


too much

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
98 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
d) 1+1 configuration without protection boxes, and with distributor subrack(s)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

These example figures show only the cabling of E1 tributaries with 120 W 3U distributor. For
document, use and communication of its contents not

other cables, refer to the other examples.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Full protected configuration with 3CC52157AAAA cords front side

Radio protected configuration with 3CC52157AAAA cords front side

Full protected configuration with 3CC52157AAAA cords rear side

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 99 / 866
e) 1+1 configuration with protection boxes, and with distributor subrack(s)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Cable positioning Front Cable positioning Rear

Cable Positioning Front Cable Positioning Rear


From IDU/EXTENSION From IDU/EXTENSION
To Service protection box SubD44pin/SubD15pin To Service protection box SubD44pin/SubD15pin

Cable Positioning
From IDU/EXTENSION
To E1 protection box SCSI968Male/SCSI68Male

End of IDU installation and cabling procedure

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
100 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3 IDU configuration types and cabling
Tab. 2. below lists the P/Ns of main IDU components:
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

Tab. 2. P/Ns of main IDU components


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION
Logistical Item & Description
N.B. the Logistical Item corresponds 16E1 32E1
to the Logistical Item code you 16E1+
16E1 + 32E1 +
16E1 + 4 ETH +
can read on the IDUs label (see 16E1 AUDIO & 32E1 AUDIO &
4 ETH AUDIO &
Fig. 14. on page 70 ) USC USC
USC
ETSI IDU MAIN UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY)
For 1+0 and 1+1 configurations
3DB16040ACXX
X
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V
3DB16058ACXX
X
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC
3DB16160AAXX
X
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENH. DATA 48V
3DB16162AAXX
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V X
Audio+USC
3DB16041ACXX
X
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V
3DB16059ACXX
X
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC
ETSI IDU EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY)
Only for 1+1 configurations
3DB16044ACXX
X X X X
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V choice
3DB16045ACXX n.b.1
EXT IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V
PROTECTION BOXES AND SUPPORT KITS
For 1+0 and 1+1 configurations
3DB16102AAXX
equipped or not equipped n.b.1
E1 Protection (SCSI 68 / Dsub 37)
3DB16103AAXX
equipped or not equipped n.b.1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15)

3DB16151ABAA necessary whenever 1 or 2 Services Protection Box(es) must


DIN Rack Kit for 2 Service protection boxes be used, with no need of the E1 Protection Box n.b.2
3DB16151AAAA necessary whenever the E1 Protection Box must be used,
DIN rack kit distributor panels (with or without the Services Protection Box)
OPTIONAL E1 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK (choice)
For 1+0 and 1+1 configurations
For employment examples, refer to IDU configurations listed in Tab. 3. on page 102
3CC07810AAAA 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 W EMC (32E1)
3CC08062AAAA 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 W non EMC (16E1)
3CC08061AAAA 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 75 W 1.6/5.6 (16E1)
3CC08061ABAA 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 75 W BNC (16E1)
n.b.1 The general equipping rules are explained:
for 1+0 configurations, in para.21.3.2 on page 377
for 1+1 configurations, in Tab. 76. on page 379
n.b.2 Fig. 118. on page 212 shows an usage example for 2 Services Protection Boxes

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 101 / 866
In the following paragraphs, the most common IDU configurations, included the list of used cables, and
the relative connection diagrams, are described, as listed in Tab. 3. below

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Tab. 3. Examples of IDU configurations

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Service
Protection
Basic configuration and With E1 Described
box
tributary configuration distributor on page
equipped
(nb1)
1+0
16E1 none N 103
none N 103
16E1 + AUDIO & USC 120 W N 104
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC N 105
16E1+ 4 ETH + AUDIO & USC 120 W N 107
32E1 none N 108
none N 108
32E1 + AUDIO & USC 120 W N 109
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC N 110
1+1 radio protected (without EPS) (nb2)
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC N 112
16E1 + AUDIO & USC
120 W N 114
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC N 115
16E1+ 4 ETH + AUDIO & USC
120 W N 117
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC N 118
32E1 + AUDIO & USC
120 W N 120
E1
Protection
1+1 fully protected (with EPS) (nb2) : EPS made by: protection
Y cable
box

75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC Y X 121


16E1 + AUDIO & USC
120 W Y X 123
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC Y X 125
16E1+ 4 ETH + AUDIO & USC
120 W Y X 127
75 W 1.6/5.6 or BNC Y X 129
32E1 + AUDIO & USC
120 W Y X 131
(nb1) in case of network interconnections for NMS channel and EOW audio continuity, the Service
Protection box is practically always required, and the connections on IDU ALMNMS
connector must be done as specified in Chapter 18 from page 195
(nb2) for the description of protection types, if necessary, refer to para.21.3.3.1 from page 378

WARNING: in all cabling diagrams, the cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable
(structure, connectors, and pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
102 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.1 16E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without Service
Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

C
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

B D

A Main
E

Installation material

Description Code Quantity

MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16040ACXX


or 1
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX

Cable Connection

Ref. Code Description From To

3CC08209AAAA Power supply connection


24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)

Cord IDU DDF


B 3CC52117ABAA
SCSI68Male/SCSI68 free 116E1 CUSTOMER

3CC52115ABAA Cord IDU DDF


C
(N.B.) SubD44Male/free Audio User Service CUSTOMER

Cord IDU DDF


D 3CC52115ABAA
SubD44Male/free ALMNMS CUSTOMER

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm 10.3 mm


E or IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm 6.85 mm

N.B. only with MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC equipped

Fig. 22. 16E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without Service
Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 103 / 866
15.3.2 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 120
Ohm

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

B C
D

A Main E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1 IDU / IDU
B 3CC52133AAAA Subrack 19inch 120
DISTR120Ohm 116E1
Ohm
IDU
DDF
C Audio User
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
D
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm 10.3
or mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85mm

Fig. 23. 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
104 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.3 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 75
Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

D Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U


or
Distributor subrack for BNC
C
B

E
F

Main G
A

Installation material

Description Code Quantity

MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1

Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA


or 1
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 105 / 866
Cable Connection

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Ref. Code Description From To

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Power supply
3CC08209AAAA connection
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply
3CC08165AAAA connection
48V (3X1.5mm2)

M1 IDU 116E1
Cord 120 Ohm
B 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x M2 (IN/OUT 18) subD 37 of cable C
16 pairs
M3 (IN/OUT 916) subD 37 of cable D

Cable for distributor Support connectors


3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s) 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
C
M2 & M3
& or or
of cable B
D
Cable for distributor Distributor subrack for
3CC07759ABAA
BNC (8 x 2 Mbit/s) BNC

IDU
DDF
E Audio
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA User Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
F
ALM NMS CUSTOMER

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 Ohm


or 10.3 mm
G IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 Ohm
6.85 mm

Fig. 24. 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm
(1.6/5.6 or BNC)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
106 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.4 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data plugin
and with distributor 120 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

B
F FF F C
D

A Main E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V Audio+USC 3DB16162AAXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1 IDU / IDU
B 3CC52133AAAA Subrack 19inch 120
DISTR120 Ohm 116E1
Ohm
IDU
DDF
C Audio User
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
D
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 Ohm
or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 Ohm
6.85mm
F 3CC52141ACAA RJ45 Cat 5 E IDUMAIN CUSTOMER

Fig. 25. 16E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data plugin and with
distributor 120 Ohm

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 107 / 866
15.3.5 32E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without Service
Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


F C

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
B D

Main
A E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V 3DB16041ACXX
or 1
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Cord IDU DDF
B 3CC52117ABAA
SCSI68Male/SCSI68 free 116E1 CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA IDU DDF
C
(N.B.) Cord Audio User Service CUSTOMER
SubD44Male/free IDU DDF
D 3CC52115ABAA
ALMNMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm 10.3 mm
E or IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm 6.85 mm
Cord IDU DDF
F 3CC52117ABAA
SCSI68Male/SCSI68 free 1732E1 CUSTOMER
N.B. only with MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC equipped

Fig. 26. 32E1 IDU 1+0 with/without Audio and User Service Channel plugin, without Service
Protection box and without E1 distributor subrack

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
108 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.6 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 120
Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

B B C
D

A Main E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
IDU Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1
B 3CC52133AAAA 116E1 Subrack 19inch 120
IDU/DISTR120Ohm
1732E1 Ohm
IDU
DDF
C Audio User
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
D
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm 10.3
or mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85mm

Fig. 27. 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 109 / 866
15.3.7 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 75
Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
D Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
or
Distributor subrack for BNC
C (116 E1)
B

G Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U


or
Distributor subrack for BNC
F (1732 E1)
E

H
I

Main J
A

Installation material

Description Code Quantity

MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1

Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA


or 2
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
110 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Cable Connection
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Ref. Code Description From To


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Power supply
3CC08209AAAA connection
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply
3CC08165AAAA connection
48V (3X1.5mm2)

M1 IDU 116E1
Cord 120 Ohm
B 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x M2 (IN/OUT 18) subD 37 of cable C
16 pairs
M3 (IN/OUT 916) subD 37 of cable D

Support connectors
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(116E1)
C
M2 & M3
& or or
of cable B
D
Distributor subrack for
Cable for distributor
3CC07759ABAA BNC
BNC (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(116E1)

M1 IDU 1732E1
Cord 120 Ohm
E 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x M2 (IN/OUT 18) subD 37 of cable F
16 pairs
M3 (IN/OUT 916) subD 37 of cable G

Support connectors
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(1732E1)
F
M2 & M3
& or or
of cable E
G
Distributor subrack for
Cable for distributor
3CC07759ABAA BNC
BNC (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(1732E1)

IDU
DDF
H Audio
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA User Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
I
ALM NMS CUSTOMER

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 Ohm


or 10.3 mm
J IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 Ohm
6.85 mm

Fig. 28. 32E1 IDU 1+0 with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm
(1.6/5.6 or BNC)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 111 / 866
15.3.8 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
D Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
or
Distributor subrack for BNC
C
B

E
F

A Main H
G

A Extension H

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA
or 1
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
112 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Cable Connection
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Ref. Code Description From To


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Power supply connection


3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)

M1 IDUMAIN 116E1

Cord 120 Ohm M2 (IN/OUT


subD 37 of cable C
B 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x 16 18)
pairs
M3 (IN/OUT
subD 37 of cable D
916)

Cable for distributor Support connectors


3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s) 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
C
or M2 & M3 or
&
of cable B
D
Cable for distributor BNC Distributor subrack for
3CC07759ABAA
(8 x 2 Mbit/s) BNC
IDUMAIN
DDF
E AUDIO
CUSTOMER
Cord USER SERV
3CC52115ABAA
SubD44Male / Free IDUMAIN
DDF
F AUDIO
CUSTOMER
ALMNMS

G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm


or 10.3 mm
H IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm

Fig. 29. 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with distributor subrack for 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm or BNC

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 113 / 866
15.3.9 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

B
C
D

A Main E
F

A Extension E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1 IDU / IDUMAIN
B 3CC52133AAAA Subrack 19inch 120
DISTR120 Ohm 116E1
Ohm
IDU
DDF
C Audio
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA User Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
D
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
F 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION

Fig. 30. 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
114 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.10 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

D Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U


or
Distributor subrack for BNC
C
B

I I I I E
F

Main H
A G

Extension H
A

Installation material

Description Code Quantity

MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V Audio+USC 3DB16162AAXX 1

EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1

Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA


or 1
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 115 / 866
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Power supply connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)

M1 IDUMAIN 116E1

Cord 120 Ohm M2 (IN/OUT


subD 37 of cable C
B 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x 16 18)
pairs
M3 (IN/OUT
subD 37 of cable D
916)

Cable for distributor Support connectors


3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s) 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
C
or M2 & M3 or
&
of cable B
D
Cable for distributor BNC Distributor subrack for
3CC07759ABAA
(8 x 2 Mbit/s) BNC
IDUMAIN
DDF
E AUDIO
CUSTOMER
Cord USER SERV
3CC52115ABAA
SubD44Male / Free IDUMAIN
DDF
F AUDIO
CUSTOMER
ALMNMS
G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
H IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
I 3CC52141ACAA RJ45 Cat 5 E IDUMAIN CUSTOMER

Fig. 31. 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data
plugin and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
116 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.11 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin,
Enhanced Data plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

B F FF F C
D

A Main E
G

A Extension E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V Audio+USC 3DB16162AAXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1 IDU / IDUMAIN
B 3CC52133AAAA Subrack 19inch 120
DISTR120 Ohm 116E1
Ohm
IDU Audio User DDF
C
Cord Service CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA
SubD44Male / free IDU DDF
D
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
F 3CC52141ACAA RJ45 Cat 5 E IDUMAIN CUSTOMER
G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION

Fig. 32. 16E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data
plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 117 / 866
15.3.12 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
D Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
or
Distributor subrack for BNC
C (116 E1)
B

G Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U


or
Distributor subrack for BNC
F (1732 E1)
E

H
I

Main K
A J

Extension K
A

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA
or 2
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
118 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Cable Connection
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Ref. Code Description From To


document, use and communication of its contents not

Power supply
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3CC08209AAAA connection
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply
3CC08165AAAA connection
48V (3X1.5mm2)
M1 IDU 116E1
Cord 120 Ohm
B 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x M2 (IN/OUT 18) subD 37 of cable C
16 pairs M3 (IN/OUT 916) subD 37 of cable D
Support connectors
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
C (116E1)
M2 & M3
& or or
of cable B
D Distributor subrack for
Cable for distributor
3CC07759ABAA BNC
BNC (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(116E1)
M1 IDU 1732E1
Cord 120 Ohm
E 3CC52134AAAA SCSI68/DSUB37 2 x M2 (IN/OUT 18) subD 37 of cable F
16 pairs M3 (IN/OUT 916) subD 37 of cable G
Support connectors
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
F (1732E1)
M2 & M3
& or or
of cable E
G Distributor subrack for
Cable for distributor
3CC07759ABAA BNC
BNC (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
(1732E1)
IDU
DDF
H Audio
Cord CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA User Service
SubD44Male / free
IDU DDF
I
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
J 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
K IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm

Fig. 33. 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 119 / 866
15.3.13 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


C D
E
B

A Main G F

Extension
A F

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
IDUMAIN
B Distributor 3U
Cable 16XE1 IDU / 116E1
3CC52133AAAA Subrack 19inch 120
DISTR120 Ohm IDUMAIN
C Ohm
1732E1
IDU Audio User DDF
D
Cord Service CUSTOMER
3CC52115ABAA
SubD44Male / free IDU DDF
E
ALM NMS CUSTOMER
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 Ohm
or 10.3 mm
F IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 Ohm
6.85 mm
G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION

Fig. 34. 32E1 IDU 1+1 radio protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
120 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.14 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

B
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Support Connectors 1.6/5.6 75 W Panel 1U or BNC


B

Line side

L L L L
Line side

Equipment side
D
Equipment side
C
F G
H

A Main E

A Extension E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
E1 Protection (SCSI 68 / Dsub 37) 3DB16102AAXX 1
Support connectors 1.6/5.6
3CC08061AAAA
75 Ohm Panel 1U
1
or
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA 1

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 121 / 866
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s) E1 protection box Support connectors
B or SCSI68/SubD 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm
Cable for distributor BNC 37 Panel 1U or BNC
3CC07759ABAA
(8 x 2 Mbit/s)
E1 protection box
IDUMAIN
C SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
Cord SCSI68SCSI68 E11/16 Main
3CC52118AAAA
L=1m E1 protection box
IDUEXTENSION
D SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
E11/16 EXT
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
Service protection box
IDUEXTENSION
F SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV
Cord IDUMAIN Service protection box
G 3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male/SubD44 AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
Male USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
H AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS
I 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
Cord Service DDF
L 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER

Fig. 35. 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with distributor subrack for 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm or BNC

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
122 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.15 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

SZ1 IN 18

SZ3 IN 916
H H H H
SZ2 OUT 18 Line side

SZ4 OUT 916

B Equipment side

M1 D E
F

A Main C
M2 G

A Extension C

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16058ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
DIN Rack Kit for 2 Service protection boxes 3DB16151ABAA
or or 1
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 123 / 866
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Power supply connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
IDUMAIN
116E1
2 SCSI Male to 4
B 3CC52157AAAA & Distributor 3U 120 Ohm
Terminals Modules
IDUEXTENSION
116E1
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
C IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
Service protection box
IDUEXTENSION
D SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male/SubD44
E AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
(0,5m) Male
USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
F AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS
G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
Cord Service DDF
H 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER

Fig. 36. 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
124 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.16 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced
Data plugin, and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

B
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Support Connectors 1.6/5.6 75 W Panel 1U or BNC


B

Line side

M M M M
Line side

Equipment side
D
Equipment side
C
I I I I F G
H

A Main E

A Extension E

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V Audio+USC 3DB16162AAXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
E1 Protection (SCSI 68 / Dsub 37) 3DB16102AAXX 1
Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA
or 1
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA 1

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 125 / 866
Cable Connection

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Ref. Code Description From To

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)

Cable for distributor


3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
E1 protection box Support connectors
B or SCSI68/SubD 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm
Cable for distributor BNC 37 Panel 1U or BNC
3CC07759ABAA
(8 x 2 Mbit/s)

E1 protection box
IDUMAIN
C SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
Cord SCSI68SCSI68 E11/16 Main
3CC52118AAAA
L=1m E1 protection box
IDUEXTENSION
D SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
E11/16 EXT

1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm


or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm

Service protection box


IDUEXTENSION
F SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV

Cord IDUMAIN Service protection box


G 3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male/SubD44 AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
Male USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV

IDUMAIN Service protection box


H AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS

I 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION

L 3CC52141ACAA RJ45 Cat 5 E IDUMAIN CUSTOMER

Cord Service DDF


M 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER

Fig. 37. 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data
plugin and with distributor 75 Ohm (1.6/5.6 or BNC)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
126 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.17 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced
Data plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack 19 inch Modules 120 W

SZ1 IN 18

SZ3 IN 916
H H H H
SZ2 OUT 18 Line side

SZ4 OUT 916

B Equipment side
I I I I
M1 D E
F

A Main C
M2 G

A Extension C

Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 16E1 ENHDATA 48V Audio+USC 3DB16162AAXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 16E1 48V 3DB16044ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
DIN Rack Kit for 2 Service protection boxes 3DB16151ABAA
or or 1
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 127 / 866
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Power supply connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
IDUMAIN
116E1
2 SCSI Male to 4
B 3CC52157AAAA & Distributor 3U 120 Ohm
Terminals Modules
IDUEXTENSION
116E1
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
C IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
Service protection box
IDUEXTENSION
D SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male/SubD44
E AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
(0,5m) Male
USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
F AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS
G 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
Cord Service DDF
H 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER
I 3CC52141ACAA RJ45 Cat 5 E IDUMAIN CUSTOMER

Fig. 38. 16E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, Enhanced Data
plugin, and with distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
128 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.18 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

B
document, use and communication of its contents not

Support Connectors 1.6/5.6 75 W Panel 1U or BNC


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

B Support Connectors 1.6/5.6 75 W Panel 1U or BNC


B

Line side

N N N N
Line side

Equipment side
D L Equipment side

I F G
H
C

A Main E

Extension E
A
Installation material
Description Code Quantity
MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX 1
EXT IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V 3DB16045ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
E1 Protection (SCSI 68 / Dsub 37) 3DB16102AAXX 1
Support connectors 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm Panel 1U 3CC08061AAAA
or 2
Distributor subrack for BNC 3CC08061ABAA
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA 1

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 129 / 866
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
Power supply connection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
Cable for distributor
3CC07885ABAA
1.6/5.6 (8 x 2 Mbit/s)
E1 protection box Support connectors
B or SCSI68/SubD 1.6/5.6 75 Ohm
Cable for distributor BNC 37 Panel 1U or BNC
3CC07759ABAA
(8 x 2 Mbit/s)
E1 protection box
IDUMAIN
C SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
Cord SCSI68SCSI68 E11/16 Main
3CC52118AAAA
L=1m E1 protection box
IDUEXTENSION
D SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
116E1
E11/16 EXT
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50Ohm
or 10.3 mm
E IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50Ohm
6.85 mm
Service protection box
IDUEXTENSION
F SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV
Cord IDUMAIN Service protection box
G 3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
SubD44Male USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
H AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS
E1 protection box
Cord SCSI68SCSI68 IDUMAIN
I 3CC52118AAAA SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
L=1m 1732 E1
E117/32 Main
SI68Male/Free
E1 protection box
L=15m IDUEXT
L 3CC52118AAAA SCSI68pin/SubD37pin
Cord SCSI68SCSI68 1732 E1
E117/32 EXT
L=1m
M 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
Cord Service DDF
N 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER

Fig. 39. 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 75 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
130 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.3.19 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Distributor 3U subrack
19 inch Modules 120 W
SZ1 IN 18

SZ3 IN 916

SZ2 OUT 18 SZ1 IN 1724 (labelled IN 18)

SZ4 OUT 916 SZ3 IN 2532 (labelled IN 916)

SZ2 OUT 1724 (labelled OUT 18)

SZ4 OUT 2532 (labelled OUT 916)

I I I I
Line side

B Equipment side

M1 M1 E F
M2 G

Main
A M2 H D

A Extension D

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 131 / 866
Installation material
Description Code Quantity

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


MAIN IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V Audio+USC 3DB16059ACXX 1

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
EXT IDU 64Mb 32E1 48V 3DB16045ACXX 1
Services Protection (Dsub44 / Dsub15) 3DB16103AAXX 1
Distributor Subrack 19Inch Modules 120Ohm 3CC07810AAAA 1
DIN Rack Kit for 2 Service protection boxes 3DB16151ABAA
or or 1
DIN Rack Kit Distributor Panels 3DB16151AAAA
Cable Connection
Ref. Code Description From To
Power supply connection
3CC08209AAAA
24V (3x2.5mm2)
A or IDU T.R.U.
Power supply connection
3CC08165AAAA
48V (3X1.5mm2)
IDUMAIN
116E1
B &
IDUEXTENSION
2 SCSI Male to 4 116E1
3CC52157AAAA Distributor 3U 120 Ohm
Terminals Modules IDUMAIN
1732E1
C &
IDUEXTENSION
1732E1
1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 Ohm
or 10.3 mm
D IDU ODU
1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 Ohm
6.85 mm
Service protection box
IDUEXTENSION
E SubD44pin/SubD15pin
USER SERV
USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
3CC52116AAAA SubD44Male/SubD44
F AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
(0,5m) Male
USER SERV AUDIO USER SERV
IDUMAIN Service protection box
G AUDIO SubD44pin/SubD15pin
ALMNMS ALMNMS
H 3DB16162ABAA 100 wire SCSI cable IDUMAIN IDUEXTENSION
Cord Service DDF
I 3DB05594AAAA
SubD15Male / free protection box CUSTOMER

Fig. 40. 32E1 IDU 1+1 fully protected with Audio and User Service Channel plugin, and with
distributor 120 Ohm

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
132 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
15.4 IDU horizontal and vertical installation
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

In following example figures, the 1U space must be left empty, to allow heat dissipation, and positioning
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

of cables.

Installation type Configuration Figure

1+1 Fig. 41.


horizontal
1+0 Fig. 42.

1+1 Fig. 43.


vertical
1+0 Fig. 44.

15.4.1 Minimum distances between systems installed horizontally in the rack

[1] In 1+1 configurations

without Protection
with Protection Boxes
Boxes

without DDF with DDF with DDF

RACK ETSI RACK ETSI RACK ETSI

1U

Protection Boxes 3U DDF 3U DDF

Main

Extension Protection Boxes 1U

1U Main Main

Protection Boxes Extension Extension

Main 1U 1U

Extension

1U 3U DDF 3U DDF

Protection Boxes

Main Protection Boxes 1U

Extension Main Main

1U Extension Extension

1U 1U 1U

Fig. 41. Horizontal installation in racks of 1+1 systems

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 133 / 866
[2] In 1+0 configurations
with Protection Boxes

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
without DDF with DDF

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


RACK ETSI RACK ETSI

1U 1U
Protection Boxes
Main 3U DDF
Protection Boxes
Main Protection Boxes
Protection Boxes Main
Main
Protection Boxes 3U DDF
Main
Protection Boxes Protection Boxes
Main Main
Protection Boxes 1U
Main 1U
1U 1U

without Protection Boxes


without DDF with DDF
first solution second solution
RACK ETSI RACK ETSI RACK ETSI

1U 1U 1U
Main Main DDF
1U Main Main
Main 1U 1U
1U Main DDF
Main Main Main
1U 1U 1U
Main Main DDF
1U Main Main
Main 1U 1U
1U Main DDF
Main Main Main
1U 1U 1U
1U 1U 1U

Fig. 42. Horizontal installation in racks of 1+0 systems

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
134 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

1U 1U [1]

Main Protection Boxes

USER MANUAL
Extension Main
In 1+1 configuration

1U Extension

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Main 1U

Extension Protection Boxes

1U Main

Main Extension
with Protection Boxes

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


without Protection Boxes

Extension 1U

1U Protection Boxes

Fig. 43. Vertical installation in racks of 1+1 systems


15.4.2 Minimum distances between systems installed vertically in the rack

Main Main

Extension Extension

1U 1U

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

135 / 866
1U 1U [2]

136 / 866
Main Protection Boxes

Main Main
In 1+0 configuration

1U 1U

Main Protection Boxes

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


Main Main

1U 1U

Main Protection Boxes


with Protection Boxes

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


without Protection Boxes

Main Main

1U 1U

Fig. 44. Vertical installation in racks of 1+0 systems


Main Protection Boxes

Main Main

1U 1U

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
16 OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter gives whole information for installation of ODUs according to the envisaged system
configurations:

Subject On page
Warnings
Safety, EMC, EMF, and ESD norms
Tutorial information
138
P/Ns of installation materials
Installation near a wall
a) ODU types and ODU description 139
b) 1+0 ODU installation procedures full integrated antenna all frequencies
Typical installation layout 150
Suggested installation procedure 151
c) 1+0 ODU installation procedures not integrated antenna all frequencies
Typical installation layout 153
Suggested installation procedure 154
d) 1+1 ODU installation procedures full integrated antenna all frequencies
Typical installation layout 157
Suggested installation procedure for (choice):
1338 GHz 158
78 GHz 163
e) 1+1 ODU installation procedures not integrated antenna all frequencies
Typical installation layout 166
Suggested installation procedure for (choice):
1338 GHz 167
78 GHz 171
f) Installation procedures for Full Indoor ODU configurations (78 GHz) 175
g) Additional installation operations
These are subprocedures referenced to by the installation procedures stated above
ODU system grounding 181
Installing the Flextwist waveguide (not integrated antenna cases) 183
Aligning the antenna 185
Solar shield installation 186

N.B. for IDU / ODU cable installation, see Chapter 17 on page 189

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 137 / 866
16.1 Warnings

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
16.1.1 Safety, EMC, EMF, and ESD norms

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


SAFETY RULES:
If not yet done, read chapter 12 from page 35 , and point iii on page 4 , which
describe the operations and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating
personnel during the working phases, and to guarantee equipment safety. Read them
with accuracy before to start every action on the equipment.

16.1.2 Tutorial information

If this is your first installation of 9400AWY Rel.2.1 ODUs, you are suggested to spend some time to read
tutorial information in para.16.2 on following pages 139 to 149 (various types of ODUs, operative
information, and labelling).
Moreover, if you need the description of ODUantenna configurations and relevant applications, refer to
para.21.2.4 on pages 372 375

16.1.3 P/Ns of installation materials

Refer to chapter 111 from page 249

16.1.4 Installation near a wall

In certain pole mounting installation circumstances, due to various reasons such as protrusions from the
wall, it might be useful to mount as shown below in order to easily install ODU module.
POLE

WALL

Fig. 45. Pole mounting near a wall

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
138 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.2 ODU types and ODU description
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

This paragraph describes the types of ODUs, and relevant operative information for installation,
document, use and communication of its contents not

commissioning and maintenance purposes:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Subject On page

ODU mechanical design and identification 140

ODU operative information 142

Operative information on ODUs with embedded or external diplexer 142

Additional operative information on ODUs with external diplexer 145

Labels affixed on the ODU 148

For ODU functional description refer to point c ) on page 370

For the Light service kit cable, please refer to para.42.12 on page 720

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 139 / 866
16.2.1 ODU mechanical design and identification

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


The ODU consists of one or two cabinets including the modem + RF transceiver + branching of a channel.

document, use and communication of its contents not


Two mechanical solutions are adopted:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


one with embedded diplexer, shown in Fig. 46. below (relevant to ODU V1) and in Fig. 48. on page
141 (relevant to ODU V2), where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the ODU cabinet; each of
this type of ODU is identified by one Logistical Item only
another with external diplexer, shown in Fig. 47. below (relevant to ODU V1) , where ODU is
composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the
RF TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of ODU is identified by
two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the RF TRANSCEIVER
assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the
BRANCHING assembly from the RF TRANSCEIVER assembly.

TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING ODU IDENTIFICATION LABEL


(see Fig. 54. on page 148)
Fig. 46. Views of ODU V1 with embedded diplexer

TRANSCEIVER BRANCHING

TRANSCEIVER BRANCHING
IDENTIFICATION LABEL IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(see Fig. 54. on page 148) (INSIDE)
(see Fig. 55. on page 149)
Fig. 47. Views of ODU V1 with external diplexer

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
140 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Fig. 48. Views of ODU V2 with embedded diplexer

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

141 / 866
16.2.2 ODU operative information

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


This paragraph gives operative information, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes

document, use and communication of its contents not


regarding:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


ODUs with embedded or external diplexer herebelow

ODUs with external diplexer (additional information) on page 145

16.2.2.1 Operative information on ODUs with embedded or external diplexer

16.2.2.1.1 General, views and access points

Fig. 49. (for ODUs with embedded diplexer) and Fig. 50. (for ODUs with external diplexer) on pages 143
144 show ODU views and access points.

The external interfaces are listed in Tab. 4. below, with the corresponding connector.

Tab. 4. ODU external interfaces


Ref. in
Further
Fig. 49. Interface Connector
information
and Fig. 50.
Tab. 5.
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler waveguide
herebelow
(2) Connector for IDU/ODU cable male N 50 ohm
para.42.12
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable 12pin LEMO
on page 720

Tab. 5. RF interface
FREQUENCY GHz 78 1315 1825 38
Waveguide type WR112 WR62 WR42 WR28

N.B. For detailed operative information regarding:

equipment commissioning, please refer to chapter 42 on page 675

equipment maintenance, please refer to section 5 on page 737

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
142 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
(4)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

TRANSCEIVER
+
BRANCHING

SOLAR SHIELD

ODU V1 ODU V2
(A)
(1)
(A)
(A)

(A)
(A)

(A)

(A)

(2) (A)
(3) (2) (3)
(A) Locking hooks (4) to fix/unfix ODU assembly to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler
WARNING: a waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the ODU. It must never be
removed.
(2) N Connector for IDU/ODU cable
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable (see Fig. 403. on page 720 )
(4) ODU identification label (see Fig. 54. on page 148 )

Fig. 49. Views of ODU with embedded diplexer

NOTE FOR CONNECTORS ON ODU V1 / V2


As shown in Fig. 49. above, the position of the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion), and
of the connector for Light service kit cable in ODU V2 is opposite with respect to ODU V1.
In any case, this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 143 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
BRANCHING

(4)

TRANSCEIVER

SOLAR SHIELD

ODU V1 ODU V2
(B) (A) (A)
(B)
(1)
(B) (B)

(A) (A)

(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)

(A)
(A) (B)
(3) (B) (3)
(2) (2)

(A) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver


(B) 4 locking hooks to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler
(1) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler
WARNING: a waterproofness tape is glued on the waveguide of the ODU. It must never be
removed.
(2) N Connector for IDU/ODU cable
(3) Connector for Light service kit cable (see Fig. 403. on page 720 )
(4) TRANSCEIVER identification label (see Fig. 54. on page 148 )

Fig. 50. Views of ODU with external diplexer

NOTE FOR CONNECTORS ON ODU V1 / V2


As shown in Fig. 50. above, the position of the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion), and
of the connector for Light service kit cable in ODU V2 is opposite with respect to ODU V1.
In any case, this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
144 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.2.2.2 ODU identification
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Through the Solar Shield window are visible the ODU or TRANSCEIVER identification label and the
document, use and communication of its contents not

Vertical or Horizontal polarization mounting. In case of ODUs with external diplexer, the BRANCHING
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

identification label (Fig. 55. on page 149) can be viewed only separating the TRANSCEIVER from the
BRANCHING.

16.2.2.3 Additional operative information on ODUs with external diplexer

16.2.2.3.1 ODU composition

As shown in Fig. 51. below, the 9470AWY ODU assembly is composed, unlike the existing ones in the
other frequency bands, by two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other
active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the ODU.

An ORING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the ODU assembly pressurization.
N.B. This is a conductive ORING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon
grease must be used only on Oring between ODU and antenna).

TRANSCEIVER

ORING

BRANCHING

Fig. 51. Composition of ODUs with external diplexer

The TRANSCEIVER box is very similar to the existing ones 9400AWY ODU used in the other frequency
bands, but without the diplexer system.

The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the
TRANSCEIVER.

The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without
disconnecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and
BRANCHING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers (A) shown in Fig. 50. on page
144.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 145 / 866
16.2.2.3.2 TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Fig. 52. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
(A) BRANCHING box label informative content
described in Fig. 55. on page 149

(B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box

(D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box


The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (1800rotated with
respect to each other):

BRANCHING boxs (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 55. on page 149); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding LOW frequency range;

BRANCHING boxs (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 55. on page 149); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding HIGH frequency range.

TRANSCEIVER BRANCHING
(D)

(A) (B)

(C)
(E)

Fig. 52. ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
146 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
N.B. There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box:
there is a mistakeproofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Fig. 53. below) to ensure that
document, use and communication of its contents not

the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one. Notice that this feature was
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

not available at the very beginning of the 7/8 GHz introduction.

mistakeproofing

mistakeproofing

Fig. 53. 78 GHz ODUs BRANCHING box mistakeproofing

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 147 / 866
16.2.3 Labels affixed on the ODU

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


a) the label depicted in Fig. 54. below is affixed externally to all types of ODU and ODUs

document, use and communication of its contents not


TRANSCEIVER boxes (see Fig. 49. on page 143 and Fig. 50. on page 144 ):

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


b) only for ODUs with external diplexers, an additional label, depicted in Fig. 55. on page 149 , is
placed on the branching assembly (see Fig. 52. on page 146 and Fig. 55. on page 149 ).

this label is just an example


SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
A9400 Equipment Acronym & AlcatelLucent Logo
CE European Community logo
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment) Logo (see para.22.10.3 on page 399)

55 1.5A Power supply (Feeding to Continuous Current)


Logistical Item (shown numbers as examples) Logistical Item for Customer
A Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
Serial no (shown numbers as examples) Factory Serial number
B Factory Serial number bar code 128
TX Frequency MHz (shown numbers as
Working frequency range
examples)
Shifter MHz (shown numbers as examples) Shifter
TX Subband (shown numbers as examples) TX Subband
Initial SW/ICS (shown numbers as examples) P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory
PN/ICS (shown numbers as examples) Factory P/N + ICS
C Factory P/N + ICS bar code 128

Fig. 54. Label affixed on the ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER box

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
148 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3DB 06775 AAAA 01 A


3DB 06775 AAXX B
C

154_B LOW 7442 7526


HIGH 7596 7680
160 LOW 7442.5 7512.5 D
HIGH 7602.5 7673.5

SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING


A9400 Equipment Acronym & AlcatelLucent Logo
CE European Community logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment) Logo (see para.22.10.3 on page 399)
PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) Factory Technical Code + ICS
A Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128
Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) Logistical Item for Customer
B Logistical Item for Customer, bar code 128
S/N CW 050609001 (example) Factory Serial number
C Factory Serial number bar code 128
the field Shifter MHz indicates the possible
frequency bands that can be used with this
branching assembly.
The choice between different shifters is done by
Craft Terminal (refer to point [3] on page 577 for
details).
D (shown numbers as examples)
for each Shifter MHz, the TX LOW and
HIGH rows indicate the frequency range
assumed by transceiver TX section, according to
the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes
coupling described in para.16.2.2.3.2 on page
146

Fig. 55. Label affixed inside the ODU BRANCHING box

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 149 / 866
16.3 1+0 ODU installation (full integrated antenna) all frequencies
16.3.1 Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
TYPE N
CONNECTOR

IDUODU CABLE
POLE

ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE A

Cable ties

IDUODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE C See NOTE B

INDOOR UNIT

Rear side

GROUNDING
Rack, TRU and IDU shelf
See NOTE C

See NOTE C

Fig. 56. Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna
NOTE A: ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT (see para.16.8 on page 181 )
1 ) The grounding cable is fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (cable
ties are supplied in the optional consumables kit)
2 ) The grounding cable is connected to the ODU grounding point
NOTE B : IDUODU cable grounding Kit (see step [4] on page 191 )
first in proximity of ODU
second in proximity of building access
in case of cable length over 80 m, the cable grounding kit must be implemented every 40 meter cable
distance.
NOTE C: IDU SYSTEM GROUNDING
For grounding at IDU level, refer to Chapter 13 on pages 55 and 57 58 (installation in rack or
on the wall), Chapter 14 on page 62 (TRU), and Chapter 15 on page 80 (IDU shelf).

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
150 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.3.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+0 ODU full integrated antenna
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODU
document, use and communication of its contents not

with external diplexer)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation

[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting


This pole mounting is delivered as pole mounting, antenna, and frequencyspecific nose
adapter already assembled. The full integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.
Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

N.B. Example figures below show pole mountings with ODU already mounted.

RFS Pole mounting (2ft) ANDREW Pole mounting (2ft)

[3] Check or change the polarization on the Antenna nose


To change the polarization, follow the instructions supplied with each antenna. Fig. 57. below shows
an example.
N.B. The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.

Fig. 57. Example of antenna polarization change (1+0 ODU full integrated antenna)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 151 / 866
[4] Take off the solar shield from the ODU transceiver by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
[5] Install the ODU on Antennas nose adapter

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


N.B. Before to insert the ODU on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease
on the Oring.

Silicone grease

Fig. 58. Putting silicone grease on Oring before ODU insertion

1) Grasp the ODU module by the handle


2) Open the four looking hooks (1) arranged on the four walls of the ODU unit
3) Rotate the ODU depending to horizontal or vertical polarization, and slide it on the nose adapter
4) Secure the ODU module through the four hooks (1) on the relative brackets (2)

(2) Brackets

(1) Hook

Fig. 59. ODU 1+0 installation for Full Integrated antenna

REMINDER: The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the two
ends are smooth. The Oring seal around the male nose provides sealing.

[6] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[7] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[8] Reinstall the solar shield onto the ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield screws:
see para.16.11 on page 186

[9] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+0 ODU installation procedure (full integrated antenna)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
152 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.4 1+0 ODU installation with non integrated antenna all frequencies
16.4.1 Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU Non integrated antenna
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

N.B. Not in all 1+0 configuration the external coupler is used. In 1+1HSBSD the coupler is not used,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

in this case it is necessary to use the same Flex twist used in 1+0, that is the 1AF119977AAAA

TYPE N
CONNECTORS

ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE A

IDUODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE C See NOTE B

Rack, TRU and IDU shelf


See NOTE C

See NOTE C

Fig. 60. Typical installation layout of 1+0 ODU Non integrated antenna
NOTE A: ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT (see para.16.8 on page 181 )
1) The grounding cable is fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (cable
ties are supplied in the optional consumables kit)
2 ) The grounding cable is connected to the ODU grounding point
NOTE B: IDUODU cable grounding Kit (see step [4] on page 191 )
first in proximity of ODU
second in proximity of building access
in case of cable length over 80 m, the cable grounding kit must be implemented every 40 meter cable
distance.
NOTE C: IDU SYSTEM GROUNDING
For grounding at IDU level, refer to Chapter 13 on pages 55 and 57 58 (installation in rack or
on the wall), Chapter 14 on page 62 (TRU), and Chapter 15 on page 80 (IDU shelf).

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 153 / 866
16.4.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+0 ODU not integrated antenna

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODU

document, use and communication of its contents not


with external diplexer)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation
[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the Pole Mounting for not integrated antenna
According to the NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting used, refer to Fig. 140. on page
284 , or to Fig. 142. on page 286
[3] Install the Pole Mounting for not integrated antenna
Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
In case of missing instructions, fix the Ubolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
N.B. Pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole.

Ubolts

Ubolts

Fig. 61. Not integrated antenna pole mounting installation


[4] Take off the solar shield from the ODU transceiver by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel
[5] Install the ODU
N.B. Before to insert the ODU on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE grease
on the Oring.

Silicone grease

Fig. 62. Putting silicone grease on Oring before ODU insertion

For NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting:


P/N 3DB10137AAAA, refer to Fig. 63. on page 155
P/N 3DB10137AAAB, refer to Fig. 64. on page 155
1 ) Grasp the ODU module by the handle. Open the four looking hooks arranged on the four walls
of the ODU unit
2 ) Position the Pole mounting support on the pole side as shown in the plant documentation
3 ) Position the ODU for desired polarization (horizontal or vertical), and slide it on the nose adapter
4 ) Secure the ODU module through the four hooks onto the relative brackets

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
154 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
WARNING: as shown in Fig. 63. on page 155 , on each arm of the pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAA there are two grooves (the inner and the outer): it is mandatory to fix the four
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

looking hooks to the inner grooves (if you use the outer grooves, you could not be able to
document, use and communication of its contents not

unlock and extract the hooks)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

REMINDER: The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the SHF flanges; the
two ends are smooth. The Oring seal around the male noses provides sealing.

DO NOT USE THIS GROOVE !

Fig. 63. ODU 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAAA)

Fig. 64. ODU 1+0 installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N 3DB10137AAAB)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 155 / 866
[6] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting
The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
[7] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the Pole Mountings nose adapter to the external
antenna, by means of the Flextwist waveguide
Refer to para.16.9 on page 183

[8] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[9] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[10] Reinstall the solar shield onto the ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield screws:
see para.16.11 on page 186

[11] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+0 ODU installation procedure (not integrated antenna)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
156 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.5 1+1 ODU installation (full integrated antenna, all frequencies)
16.5.1 Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

TYPE N CONNECTORS

ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE A

See NOTE C IDUODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT


See NOTE B

Rack, TRU and IDU shelf


See NOTE C

See NOTE C

Fig. 65. Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna (all frequencies)

NOTE A: ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT (see para.16.8 on page 181 )


1) The grounding cables are fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (cable
ties are supplied in the optional consumables kit)
2 ) The 2 grounding cables are connected to the grounding point of each ODU
NOTE B : IDUODU cable grounding Kit (see step [4] on page 191 )
first in proximity of ODU
second in proximity of building access
in case of cable length over 80 m, the cable grounding kit must be implemented every 40 meter cable
distance.
NOTE C: IDU SYSTEM GROUNDING
For grounding at IDU level, refer to Chapter 13 on pages 55 and 57 58 (installation in rack or
on the wall), Chapter 14 on page 62 (TRU), and Chapter 15 on page 80 (IDU shelf).

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 157 / 866
16.5.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna (1338 GHz)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs

document, use and communication of its contents not


with external diplexer)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation

[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting


This pole mounting is delivered as pole mounting, antenna, and frequencyspecific nose
adapter already assembled. The full integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.
Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

[3] Check or change the polarization of the RF coupler


The axial adaptation between H polarization to V polarization (and viceversa) is a
mechanical/electrical adjustment. Every mechanical STEP is a 30 adjustment.

2nd Step

1st Step

Fig. 66. Coupler Polarization Change (1338 GHz) 1st Step and 2nd step

The final result must be as shown in Fig. 69. on page 159 (example for V polarization): the
engraved polarization symbols (H or V) must coincide with the reference blind hole.

Change Polarization Procedure

1) 1st Step = internal 30 rotate

Coupler body

1st Step
Rotate 30

Fig. 67. Coupler Polarization Change (1338 GHz) 1st Step execution

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
158 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
2) 2nd Step= cover + screws 60( 30+ 30) rotate

Coupler body
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2st Step
Rotate 60

Fig. 68. Coupler Polarization Change (1338 GHz) 2nd Step execution

The spigot in the full Integrated Antenna configuration is 30 and complete the change of
polarization (90).

engraved
reference polarization
blind hole symbols
(H and V)

note: shown example is for V polarization


Fig. 69. Coupler Polarization Change (1338 GHz) Screws fixing

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 159 / 866
[4] Install the RF coupler on antennas nose adapter
N.B. Before to insert the RF coupler on antennas nose adapter, it is mandatory to put

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


SILICONE grease on the Oring.

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Silicone grease

Fig. 70. Putting silicone grease on Oring before RF coupler insertion (1338 GHz)

Grasp the coupler by the handle. Fasten the coupler to the support through the four locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the radio support.
The label corresponds to the side of the pole

ENGRAVED
INDICATION

Fig. 71. Installing the RF coupler to the radio support (1338 GHz)

PIPE

WARNING: verify that the indication , engraved on the coupler, is directed toward the
side pole:

PIPE
(side pole) PIPE

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
160 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[5] For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

[6] Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. Before to insert each ODU on RF couplers nose adapters, it is mandatory to put
SILICONE grease on the Orings.
Silicone grease

Fig. 72. Putting silicone grease on RF couplers Oring before ODU insertion (1338 GHz)

Grasp each ODU by the handle. Fasten the ODU module to the support through the locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening bracket on the coupler.

Fastening
Locking
brackets
hooks

Fig. 73. Installing the ODU 1+1 on the RF coupler for full Integrated antenna (1338 GHz)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 161 / 866
Fig. 74. below shows the final result, and indicates which ODU must be respectively connected to
the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units, as described in Chapter 17 from page 189

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
ODU
to be connected
to IDU MAIN unit

ODU
to be connected
to IDU EXTENSION unit

RF coupler

Fig. 74. Views of ODU 1+1 Full integrated antenna after installation (1338 GHz)

[7] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[8] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[9] Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield
screws: see para.16.11 on page 186

[10] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna installation procedure (1338 GHz)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
162 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.5.3 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna (78 GHz)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs
document, use and communication of its contents not

with external diplexer)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation

[2] Install the Antenna and Pole Mounting


This pole mounting is delivered as pole mounting, antenna, and frequencyspecific nose
adapter already assembled. The full integrated antenna is mounted on the pole front.
Antenna and pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

[3] Check or change the polarization of the RF coupler


a) Vertical Polarization to Horizontal Polarization
The point of reference is on the position V (Vertical Polarization).
To change the polarization, perform the following operations:
1 ) unscrew the three screws
2 ) turn the thin twist and to make to coincide the position H to the point of reference A
3 ) screw the screws
b) Horizontal Polarization to Vertical Polarization
The point of reference is on the position H (Horizontal Polarization).
To change the polarization, perform the following operations:
1 ) unscrew the three screws
2 ) turn the thin twist and to make to coincide the position H to the point of reference A
3 ) screw the screws

Detail B Point of Detail A


Point of
reference Screw reference
A A

Screw
TWIST

See Detail B See Detail A

Fig. 75. Coupler Polarization Change (78 GHz)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 163 / 866
[4] Install the RF coupler on antennas nose adapter
N.B. Before to insert the RF coupler on antennas nose adapter, it is mandatory to put

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


SILICONE grease on the Oring.

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Grasp the coupler by the handle. Fasten the coupler to the support through the four locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the radio support .
The label corresponds to the side of the pole
Locking
hook
Silicon
grease

Fastening
bracket

MAIN
ACCESS

Fig. 76. Installing the RF coupler to the radio support (78 GHz)

[5] For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel

[6] Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler


N.B. Before to insert each ODU on RF couplers nose adapters, it is mandatory to put
SILICONE grease on the Orings.

Silicone grease
Fig. 77. Putting silicone grease on Oring before ODU insertion (78 GHz)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
164 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Grasp the ODU transceiver by the handle, and fasten it to the coupler support through the four locking
hooks that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on coupler.
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

Fig. 78. below shows the final result, and indicates which ODU must be respectively connected to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units, as described in Chapter 17 from page 189

Locking
hook

Fastening
bracket

ODU
to be connected
to IDU EXTENSION unit

ODU
to be connected
to IDU MAIN unit

RF coupler
Fig. 78. Installing the ODU 1+1 on the RF coupler for full Integrated antenna (78 GHz)

[7] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[8] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[9] Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield
screws: see para.16.11 on page 186

[10] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+1 ODU full integrated antenna installation procedure (78 GHz)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 165 / 866
16.6 1+1 ODU installation with not integrated antenna all frequencies
16.6.1 Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU Non integrated antenna

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
ODU SYSTEM
GROUNDING KIT
See NOTE A IDUODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT
See NOTE B
See NOTE C

Rack, TRU and IDU shelf


See NOTE C

See NOTE C

Fig. 79. Typical installation layout of 1+1 ODU Non integrated antenna (all frequencies)

NOTE A: ODU SYSTEM GROUNDING KIT (see para.16.8 on page 181 )


1 ) The grounding cables are fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (cable
ties are supplied in the optional consumables kit)
2 ) The 2 grounding cables are connected to the grounding point of each ODU
NOTE B : IDUODU cable grounding Kit (see step [4] on page 191 )
first in proximity of ODU
second in proximity of building access
in case of cable length over 80 m, the cable grounding kit must be implemented every 40 meter cable
distance.
NOTE C: IDU SYSTEM GROUNDING
For grounding at IDU level, refer to Chapter 13 on pages 55 and 57 58 (installation in rack or
on the wall), Chapter 14 on page 62 (TRU), and Chapter 15 on page 80 (IDU shelf).

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
166 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.6.2 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna (1338 GHz)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs
document, use and communication of its contents not

with external diplexer)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation

[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the not integrated antenna Pole Mounting for ODU
According to the NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting used, refer to Fig. 140. on page
284 , or to Fig. 142. on page 286

[3] Install the not integrated antenna Pole Mounting for ODU
Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
In case of missing instructions, fix the Ubolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
N.B. Pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole.

Ubolts

Ubolts

Fig. 80. Not integrated antenna pole mounting installation

[4] Install the RF coupler on the nose adapter


N.B. Before to insert the RF coupler on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE
grease on the Oring.

Silicone grease

Fig. 81. Putting silicone grease on Oring before RF coupler insertion

For NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting:


P/N 3DB10137AAAA, refer to Fig. 82. on page 168
P/N 3DB10137AAAB, refer to Fig. 83. on page 168

Grasp the coupler by the handle. Fasten the coupler to the support through the four locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the Pole Mounting.
WARNING: as shown in Fig. 82. on page 168 , on each arm of the pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAA there are two grooves (the inner and the outer): it is mandatory to fix the four
looking hooks to the inner grooves (if you use the outer grooves, you could not be able to unlock
and extract the hooks)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 167 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
DO NOT USE THIS GROOVE !

Fig. 82. 1338 GHz RF coupler installation for not integrated antenna (pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAA)

Fig. 83. 1338 GHz RF coupler installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAB)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
168 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[5] For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

[6] Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. Before to insert each ODU on RF couplers nose adapters, it is mandatory to put
SILICONE grease on the Orings.
Silicone grease

Fig. 84. Putting silicone grease on RF couplers Oring before ODU insertion (1338 GHz)

Grasp each ODU by the handle. Fasten the ODU module to the support through the locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening bracket on the coupler.
Fig. 85. below shows the final result, and indicates which ODU must be respectively connected to
the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units, as described in Chapter 17 from page 189

RF coupler
Fastening bracket
Pole mounting
on the coupler
(not integrated
antenna)
ODU
ODU to be connected
to be connected to IDU MAIN unit
to IDU EXTENSION unit

Fig. 85. Installation of ODU 1+1 not integrated antenna (1338 GHz)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 169 / 866
[7] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting
The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
[8] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the ODU Pole Mountings nose adapter to the external
antenna, by means of the Flextwist waveguide
Refer to para.16.9 on page 183

[9] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[10] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[11] Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield
screws: see para.16.11 on page 186

[12] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna installation procedure (1338 GHz)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
170 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.6.3 Suggested installation procedure of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna (78 GHz)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

[1] Check/Set the coupling between the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (only for ODUs
document, use and communication of its contents not

with external diplexer)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Making reference to para.16.2.2.3.2 on page 146 , set coupling according to the plant
documentation

[2] Install the Nose Adapter on the not integrated antenna Pole Mounting for ODU
According to the NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting used, refer to Fig. 140. on page
284 , or to Fig. 142. on page 286

[3] Install the not integrated antenna Pole Mounting for ODU
Pole mounting must be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
In case of missing instructions, fix the Ubolts with 34 N x m tightening torque.
N.B. Pole mounting can be installed on the Right or Left hand side of the pole.

Ubolts

Ubolts

Fig. 86. Not integrated antenna pole mounting installation

[4] Install the RF coupler on the nose adapter


N.B. Before to insert the RF coupler on nose adapter, it is mandatory to put SILICONE
grease on the Oring.

Silicone grease

Fig. 87. Putting silicone grease on Oring before RF coupler insertion

For NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA Pole Mounting:


P/N 3DB10137AAAA, refer to Fig. 88. on page 172
P/N 3DB10137AAAB, refer to Fig. 89. on page 172

Grasp the coupler by the handle. Fasten the coupler to the support through the four locking hooks
that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on the Pole Mounting.
WARNING: as shown in Fig. 88. on page 172 , on each arm of the pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAA there are two grooves (the inner and the outer): it is mandatory to fix the four
looking hooks to the inner grooves (if you use the outer grooves, you could not be able to unlock
and extract the hooks)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 171 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
DO NOT USE
THIS GROOVE !

Fig. 88. 78 GHz RF coupler installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAA)

Fig. 89. 78 GHz RF coupler installation for not integrated antenna (with pole mounting P/N
3DB10137AAAB)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
172 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[5] For each ODU transceiver, take off the solar shield by unscrewing the two screws placed on the
solar shield back panel
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

[6] Install the ODU transceivers on the RF coupler


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. Before to insert each ODU on RF couplers nose adapters, it is mandatory to put
SILICONE grease on the Orings.

Silicone grease

Silicone grease

Fig. 90. Putting silicone grease on Oring before ODU insertion (78 GHz)

Grasp the ODU transceiver by the handle, and fasten it to the coupler support through the four locking
hooks that will be tightened onto the relative fastening brackets on coupler.

Locking
hook

Fastening
bracket

Fig. 91. Installing the ODU 1+1 on the RF coupler (for not Integrated antenna 78 GHz)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 173 / 866
Fig. 92. below shows the final result, and indicates which ODU must be respectively connected to
the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units, as described in Chapter 17 from page 189

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
ODU ODU

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


to be connected to be connected
to IDU EXTENSION unit RF coupler to IDU MAIN unit

Pole mounting
(not integrated
antenna)

RF coupler
ODU
to be connected
to IDU EXTENSION unit
Pole mounting
(not integrated
ODU antenna)
to be connected
to IDU MAIN unit

Fig. 92. ODU 1+1 installed on the RF coupler (for not Integrated antenna 78 GHz)

[7] Install the external Antenna with its own Pole Mounting
The installation of the antenna and of its own pole mounting, as well as the antenna polarization
check/change, must be done in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

[8] Connect the antenna side (flange) of the ODU Pole Mountings nose adapter to the external
antenna, by means of the Flextwist waveguide
Refer to para.16.9 on page 183

[9] Ground the ODU system (see para.16.8 on page 181 )

[10] Prepoint the antenna (see para.16.10.1 on page 185 )

[11] Reinstall the solar shield onto each ODU transceiver by screwing on it the two solar shield
screws: see para.16.11 on page 186

[12] Affix the EMF stickers (see para.12.3.7.2 on page 43 )

End of 1+1 ODU not integrated antenna installation procedure (78 GHz)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
174 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.7 Full Indoor ODU configurations (78 GHz)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The Full Indoor ODU configurations presently available are for 7 8 GHz, and are depicted in following
document, use and communication of its contents not

Fig. 93.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2 x (1+1) ODU 1 x (1+1) ODU 2 x (1+0) ODU

Pressure window/inlet

1U UBR84 1U UBR84 1U UBR84

3U 3U 3U

14U

27U 24U
Front view
7U

7U
5U
4U
7U
4U 5U

3U 3U 3U

Fig. 93. 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU configurations

The UBR84 pressure window/inlet is connected to the antenna feeder by means of flex wave guide.

The Full Indoor ODU installation is done with the use of specific mounting kits:

Configuration on page
7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU installation in LABORACK
176
High/Low mount
Kit for low mount 177
Kit for high mount 179

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 175 / 866
16.7.1 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU configuration for installation in LABORACK

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
HIGH MOUNT
LOW MOUNT

Fig. 94. 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU configuration for installation in LABORACK (High/Low mount)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
176 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[1] Kit for low mount
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. Waveguide type WR112 with flange type UBR84

Fig. 95. Low mount kit drawing for 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU installation in LABORACK

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 177 / 866
Tab. 6. Low mount kit part list for 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU installation in LABORACK

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


REF

document, use and communication of its contents not


ALCATELLUCENT CODE DESCRIPTION Q.TY

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Fig. 95.

3CC52135AAAA Support 1 1

3CC58038AAAA Bracket 2 2

3CC58040AAAA Bracket 1 3

3CC58041AAAA Bracket 1 4

1AD009150040 Screw M10X20 4 5

1AD001970097 NUT M10*8.00MM 4 6

Washer plain
1AD00870180 4 7
10.5mmx21mmx2mm/M10

1AD00915001 Screw M6X12mm 10 8

Washer plain
1AD00870136 10 9
6.4mmx12.5mmx1.6mm/M6

1AD002920002 NUT M6*9.5MM 10 10

3CC58037AAAA Double bend e plane 1 11

1AD009150010 Screw M4 4 12

Washer plain
1AD000870153 4 13
4.3mm x 8mm x 800mm/M4

3DB02438AAAA block 1 14

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
178 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[2] Kit for high mount
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. Waveguide type WR112 with flange type UBR84

Fig. 96. High mount kit drawing for 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU installation in LABORACK

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 179 / 866
Tab. 7. Low mount kit part list for 7 8 GHz Full Indoor ODU installation in LABORACK

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


REF

document, use and communication of its contents not


ALCATELLUCENT CODE DESCRIPTION Q.TY

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Fig. 96.

3CC52135AAAA Support 1 1

3CC58038AAAA Bracket 2 2

3CC58040AAAA Bracket 1 3

3CC58041AAAA Bracket 1 4

1AD009150040 Screw M10X20 4 5

1AD001970097 NUT M10*8.00MM 4 6

Washer plain
1AD00870180 4 7
10.5mmx21mmx2mm/M10

1AD00915001 Screw M6X12mm 10 8

Washer plain
1AD00870136 10 9
6.4mmx12.5mmx1.6mm/M6

1AD002920002 NUT M6*9.5MM 10 10

3CC58036AAA Double bend e plane 1 11

1AD009150010 Screw M4 4 12

Washer plain
1AD000870153 4 13
4.3mm x 8mm x 800 mm/M4

3DB02438AAAA Bock 1 14

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
180 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.8 ODU system grounding
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Each ODU transceiver must be individually grounded.


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. neither the RF coupler, nor the antenna(s), integrated or not integrated, must be grounded.

The grounding of ODU transceivers is shown in the following typical installation layouts:

ODU system antenna typical installation layout

full integrated Fig. 56. on page 150


1+0 ODU
not integrated Fig. 60. on page 153

full integrated Fig. 65. on page 157


1+1 ODU
not integrated Fig. 79. on page 166

The following items are necessary for the individual grounding of each ODU transceiver:

one ODU Grounding Kit (P/N 3CC08166AAAA ).


This kit corresponds to a cable (16mm2 L=15m) that must be cut on site and connected to the terminal
provided on the ODU transceiver, and, on the other side, to the nearest grounding plate.

one Common kit V2 (P/N 3DB21042AAAB ).


This kit includes, besides other mechanical elements, those necessary for fixing the ODU grounding
cable (lugs, screws, washers, etc.)

N.B. these two kits are present in the ODU installation components tables on pages 251 to 257

This example figure shows the grounding cable connected on a 1+0 ODU:

ODU grounding cable to be


connected to the nearest
grounding plate

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 181 / 866
This other example figure shows the grounding cables connected on a 1+1 ODU 1338 GHz:

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Grounding cable Grounding cable
for 1st ODU for 2nd ODU

ODU grounding cables to be connected to the nearest grounding plate

Connect all grounding cables to the nearest grounding plate, as shown in this example:

[1]

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
182 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.9 Installing the Flextwist waveguide (not integrated antenna cases)
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Concerning the interface between the ODU output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the following
document, use and communication of its contents not

Tab. 8. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

external antenna.

Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm
diameter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the
elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.

Tab. 8. ODU Output flanges with external antenna


Equipment Suggested
ODU Output
and Range FLEXTWIST Antenna
Flange
(GHz) Flange

A C.E.I. E.I.A. B C D

UDR84 R84 WR112 PDR84 UBR84 PBR84


9470 AWY
or:
78
UBR84 R84 WR112 PBR84 UBR84 PBR84
9413 AWY
UBR120 R120 WR75 PBR120 UBR120 PBR120
12.7 13.3
9415 AWY
UBR140 R140 WR62 PBR140 UBR140 PBR140
14.2 15.4
9418 AWY
17.7 19.7
9423 AWY
UBR220 R220 WR42 PBR220 UBR220 PBR220
21.2 23.6
9425 AWY
24.5 26.5
9438 AWY
UBR320 R320 WR28 PBR320 UBR320 PBR320
37.0 40.0

L=1000 mm for 78 GHz


L=600 mm for 1338 GHz

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 183 / 866
The long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end, it has
a smooth square or rectangular flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


square flange designed to accommodate an Oring seal (mounted at the ODU end).

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Tab. 9. 7/8GHz Flextwist waveguide

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

Stainless Stainless
Onduflex
Freq. steel steel Stainless HM.
Length springy
Alcatel code Waveguide Band Flanges socket socket Z. flat Hex
mm. crinkle
GHz. cap cap washers nuts
washers
screws screws

12 8 12
1AF11977AAXX WR112 1.000 7,05 10 PDR84 UBR84 12 (B4) 12 (Z4)
(M4x25) (M4x20) (HM4)

3CC08010ABAB 8 8
WR112 1.000 7,05 10 PBR84 UBR84 8 (B4) 8 (Z4) 8 (HM4)
(Note A) (M4x25) (M4x12)

Note A: next introduction in substitution of 1AF11977AAXX

Tab. 10. 13/38GHz Flextwist waveguide

FLEXIBLE TWISTABLE WAVEGUIDE KIT

Stainless Stainless
Onduflex
Freq. steel steel Stainless HM.
Length springy
Alcatel code Waveguide Band Flanges socket socket Z. flat Hex
mm. crinkle
GHz. cap cap washers nuts
washers
screws screws

8 8 12
3CC05751ACAA WR75 600 10 15,0 PBR120 UBR120 8 (B4) 12 (Z4)
(M4x20) (M4x12) (HM4)

8 8
3CC05750ACAA WR62 600 12,4 18 PBR140 UBR140 8 (B4) 8 (Z4) 8 (HM4)
(M4x20) (M4x12)

8 8
3CC05749ACAA WR42 600 18 26,5 PBR220 UBR220 8 (B3) 8 (Z3) 8 (HM3)
(M3x20) (M3x12)

8 8
3DB00682AAAA WR28 600 26,5 40 PBR320 UBR320 8 (B3) 8 (Z3) 8 (HM3)
(M3x20) (M3x12)

N.B. If the FLEXTWIST is not provided by Alcatel, the user must carefully choose the type of the
connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between
ANTENNA/flextwist and flextwist/ODU contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this
purpose please note that the surfaces are:

chromiumplated at ODUs output flange side

tinplated at flextwists flange side

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
184 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
16.10 Aligning the antenna
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

16.10.1 Antenna prepointing


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Antenna prepointing alignment involves adjusting the direction of each antenna toward the other antenna
of the radio link.

First horizontal prepointing (azimuth)


Horizontally place the antenna according to the direction set down in the plant documents where,
among the various indication are indicated those concerning the reference points (Position of the
tower or of the building with respect to true north) in order to point the antenna in the set direction.
There are various procedures and technical means to adopt in order to mechanically prepoint the
antenna, and they can be implemented in various ways according to the various configurations and
to the various system conditions.
The standard instrumentation is the compass.

Second vertical prepointing (zenith)


Place the antenna vertically nearest to its operating angle.
The technical and operative procedure adopted to vertically point the antenna is as that previously
implemented to horizontally prepoint.

In configurations with two antennas, repeat the procedure for the second antenna.

Notes:

a) At the end of the prepointing operation, slowly block all the horizontal and vertical regulating system
of the antenna taking care not to modify dish direction
b) Final antenna pointing (or connection) shall be established only after all the Antenna and ODU
system is fully installed.
c) After the fine pointing TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR THE SCREWS OF M10 IS OF 30Nm

16.10.2 Fine antenna alignment

Fine antenna alignment involves adjusting the direction of each antenna until the received signal strength
its maximum level at each and of the link.

The antenna fine alignment is performed in the commissioning phase: refer to para.42.11 on page 719

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 185 / 866
16.11 Solar shield installation

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


One solar shield (P/N 3CC13476AAAA) is automatically delivered with each supplied ODU.

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Figure Fig. 97. below shows the solar shield mounting.
The ARROW shows the polarization.

Solar shield

Screw
ODU

H
H

V
V
Screw

Polarization V Polarization H

Fig. 97. Solar shield installation

In vertical or horizontal polarization, the solar shield remains fixed in the same position and the ODU is
the only part which can rotate 90 degrees when changing the polarization.

N.B. Solar shield has to be installed only after ODU installation.

Fig. 98. on page 187 shows views of installed ODU solar shields.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
186 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1+0 ODU solar shield view 1+1 ODU solar shields view (13 to 38GHz)

1+1 ODU solar shields view (78GHz)

Fig. 98. ODU solar shields views

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 187 / 866
188 / 866
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
17 IDUODU CABLE INSTALLATION MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Subject On page

Installation components for IDUODU cable below

Suggested IDUODU cable installation procedure 190

17.1 Installation components for IDUODU cable

17.1.1 Maximum length and cable types to use


Max length of IDU/ODU cable ..
.. for capacity .. for capacity Code of cable to use Description
v 16E1 17E1 B 32E1
250 m 150 m 1AC001100022 Coax cable 50 ohm 10.3 mm
120 m 80 m 1AC041350001 Coax cable 50 ohm 6.85 mm

WARNING: the equipment can work with capacity v 16E1 or 17E1 B 32E1. In case of initial
configuration at capacity v 16E1 and a successive extension to capacity 17E1 B 32E1,
the IDU/ODU cable length must be checked according to the above table.

17.1.2 Nconnector for IDU / ODU cable

Hereafter are reported the suggested AlcatelLucent connectors:


Cable Code Code of Connector
Connector Description
(para.17.1.1 above) to use
1AC001100022 1AB095530021 Connector male N 90 50 Ohm (diam. 10.3 mm)
1AC041350001 1AB095530037 Connector male N 90 50 Ohm (diam. 6.85 mm)

17.1.3 IDU / ODU cable grounding kit assembling


Cable Code Code of Grounding
Grounding kit Description
(para.17.1.1 above) kit to use
IDUODU cable grounding kit for coax cable 50 ohm
1AC001100022 1AB128500002
10.3 mm
IDUODU cable grounding kit for coax cable 50 ohm
1AC041350001 1AD040130004
6.85 mm

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 189 / 866
17.2 Suggested IDUODU cable installation procedure

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. Quality of the preparation and of the installation is essential to guarantee electrical, mechanical

document, use and communication of its contents not


and waterproof performances.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


SAFETY RULES:
If not yet done, read chapter 12 from page 35 , and carefully observe statements for
your safety

[1] Install the cable in the cable tray


Tighten the tie raps in
cross form

Cable must follow the structure with a


minimum curve radius of 1520 cm

[2] Install the cable in the feed thru plate

Internal view

N.B. Waterproof the cables at the entrance of the shelter

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
190 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[3] Mount the N connectors on the cable
Connector P/N as in para.17.1.2 on page 189
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

In order to assemble the connectors to the coaxial cable, refer to the leaflet enclosed into the supplied
document, use and communication of its contents not

connector bag.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

The tightening torque on connector on the cable must be 2.5 Nm

[4] Ground the cable


Grounding kit P/N as in para.17.1.3 on page 189
Use the Blue label spacing

Remove the jacket

Metal contact

Install the
grounding kit

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 191 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Tighten with allen key
8 mm

Coaxial cable grounding kit


connection to the tower grounding

ATTENTION

As specified on pages 150 , 153 , 157 , and 166 :

a) two grounding kits at least must be installed:


first, in proximity of ODU (5m maximum)
second, in under feed thru flat of the building

b) in case of cable length over 80 m, the cable grounding kit must be implemented every 40
meter cable distance.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
192 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[5] Label and connect the cable to the ODU
Labelling:
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Example for cable connected to Example for cable connected to


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

IDU MAIN unit IDU EXTENSION unit

Link ID RF MAIN POL H or V Link ID RF EXTENSION POL H or V

Connection:

IDUODU cable

The tightening torque on Connector N (Male) on the ODU must


be 3 Nm

[6] Waterproof the connector on ODU

Surround the connector with the auto amalgamate tape


from up to down

Surround the connector with the adhesive tape


from up to down

Put tie raps on the up and the down of the connector

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 193 / 866
[7] Label and connect the cable to the IDU

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Labelling:

document, use and communication of its contents not


Example for cable connected to Example for cable connected to

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


IDU MAIN unit IDU EXTENSION unit

Link ID RF MAIN Link ID RF EXTENSION

Connection:

Before connecting the cable to IDU, verify that the IDU unit
(MAIN and EXTENSION, if present) is switched off

IDUODU Cable for IDU MAIN unit


IDUODU Cable for IDU EXTENSION unit

The tightening torque on Connector N (Male) on the IDU must


be 2 Nm

End of IDUODU cable installation procedure

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
194 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18 NETWORK INTERCONNECTIONS
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

This chapter:
gives the interconnection diagrams and the associated list of cables for network interconnections
regarding the NMS channel continuity, and the EOW audio continuity
and describes the E1 interconnections with the 9500MPRE Microwave Packet Radio MSS
equipment

Service
Protection
Subject On page
Box
usage

Introduction on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity 197

Solutions for NMS channel continuity between two colocated 9400AWY


197
R.2.1 NEs

Interconnections between a 9400AWY R.2.1 NE with other


197
AlcatelLucent colocated radio transmission NE types

9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections without the Service Protection


N 198
Box

NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet


N 198
ports and ALM_NMS connectors

NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet


N 204
port and Ethernet port (of Enhanced Ethernet plugin)

General on interconnections with the Service Protection Box Y 208

EOW audio continuity and EOW party line structure in 9400AWY R.2.1 Y 208

General on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity Y 209

NMS channel and EOW audio continuity with the Service Protection Box Y 210

Available supports for the Service Protection Box Y 212

9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections with the Service Protection


Y 213
Box

NMS Continuity with the Service Protection Box Y 213

AUDIO Connection Y 217

NMS Ring Protection with Audio Continuity Y 219

ESC Continuity Y 221


table continues

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 195 / 866
Service
Protection

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


Subject On page
Box

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
usage

9400AWY MELODIE SNMP interconnections Y 222

NMS Continuity with Audio Connection Y 222

Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 classic) Y 224

Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 Light) Y 225

Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1) Y 226

Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1) Y 227

9400AWY MELODIE RQ2 interconnections Y 228

9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Classic) Y 228

9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Light) Y 230

9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1) Y 232

9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1) Y 234

RQ2 9.6 Kb/s Transport Y 236

E1 interconnections between 9400AWY and 9500MPRE MSS Y 237

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
196 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.1 Introduction on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

In this context, network interconnections are meant as those to allow the remote NE supervision (NMS
document, use and communication of its contents not

channel continuity), as well as the propagation of the EOW (EOW audio continuity).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 183. on page 413 shows an example of 9400AWY NEs remotely supervised by their Radio interface
and NMS rings and chains.

This chapter deals with the ways to create an interworking network based on different products and to
provide certificated solutions:

focusing on the available product interconnections for the following AlcatelLucentLucent wireless
transmission products:

9400AWY Rel.2.1

Melodie via SNMP or RQ2

integrating in a Telecommunication Management Network (TMN), which can be based on :

a remote Craft Terminal (via F or Ethernet connected);

the AlcatelLucent Network Management System 1352CM PC based where supported;

the AlcatelLucent Network Management System 1353NM WS based;

an external Operations System (OS) provided / developed by the customer.

18.1.1 Solutions for NMS channel continuity between two colocated 9400AWY R.2.1 NEs

Two solutions are possible to interconnect two colocated 9400AWY R.2.1 NEs: without or with the
Service Protection Box:

the solution without the Service Protection Box employes the direct interconnection through their
OS Ethernet ports or their ALM_NMS connectors by a special cable, as described in para.18.2 from
page 198

WARNING: when this interconnection is employed, the housekeeping signals cannot be


accessed on the IDU MAIN unit front panel (see signals HK_xx in Tab. 65. from page
311 )

with the Service Protection Box. In this case, refer to para.18.4 from page 213

18.1.2 Interconnections between a 9400AWY R.2.1 NE with other AlcatelLucent colocated


radio transmission NE types

For interconnections with:

Melodie equipment, the Service Protection Box is always required, as described in para.18.5 from
page 222 , and para.18.6 from page 228

9500MPRE equipment, the Service Protection Box is never used; the E1 signal interconnection,
if necessary, is described in para.18.7 on page 237 ; the NMS channel continuity must be done
connecting the 9400AWY R.2.1 NEs OS Ethernet port to the corresponding port of the 9500MPRE
equipment.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 197 / 866
18.2 9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections without the Service Protection
Box

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


document, use and communication of its contents not
18.2.1 NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet ports and

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


ALM_NMS connectors

WARNING 1: when this interconnection is employed, the housekeeping signals cannot be accessed on
the IDU MAIN unit front panel (see signals HK_xx in Tab. 65. from page 311 )
WARNING 2: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

[1] Case 1: Management through OS port


Management
Cable B through OS port

Station A Cable A

Station B
Cable C

Cable A
Station C

For cables A:
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
3CC52143ABAA
(1.6 m)
Sub.D 44 pins / First station Second station
or
Sub.D 44 pins (IDUMAIN) ALM_NMS (IDUMAIN) ALM_NMS
3CC52143ACAA
(6.4 m)

For cable B:
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
Station A OS (or ECT)
3CC52141Axxx RJ45 Eth Direct Customer
port

For cable C:
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
Station Bs OS(or ECT) Station Cs OS (or ECT)
3CC52142Axxx RJ45 Eth Cross
port port

Fig. 99. NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box: case 1

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
198 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Software configuration procedure for case 1 ( Fig. 99. ):
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

1) Configure OS port on each stations ( Fig. 100. )


document, use and communication of its contents not

Enable all stations OS port and OSPF routing protocol.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. The IP address and OSPF Area Point is just an example. Operator should follow IP
administration policy in each field.

Fig. 100. Configure OS port on each stations

2) Setup PPP link

Select V11 or G703

For station B, in the Mode combox, select DTE ( Fig. 101. ); For Station C, select
Codirectional ( Fig. 102. )

Enable OSPF routing protocol.

N.B. The OSPF area MUST be the same as OSPF area of OS port [ step 1 ) above]

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 199 / 866
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
Fig. 101. Setup PPP link: DTE

Fig. 102. Setup PPP link: Codirectional

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
200 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
[2] Case 2: Management through Microwave link
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Management through
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Microwave Link

Station A Cable A

Station B
Cable C

Cable A
Station C

For cables A:
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
3CC52143ABAA
(1.6 m)
Sub.D 44 pins / First station Second station
or
Sub.D 44 pins (IDUMAIN) ALM_NMS (IDUMAIN) ALM_NMS
3CC52143ACAA
(6.4 m)

For cable C:
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
Station Bs OS(or ECT) Station Cs OS (or ECT)
3CC52142Axxx RJ45 Eth Cross
port port

Fig. 103. NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box: case 2

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 201 / 866
Software configuration procedure for case 2 ( Fig. 103. ):

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


1) Configure OS port on each stations, except Station A ( Fig. 104. )

document, use and communication of its contents not


Enable all stations OS port and OSPF routing protocol.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


Fig. 104. Configure OS port on each stations

2) Setup PPP link

Select V11 or G703

For station B, in the Mode combox, select DTE ( Fig. 105. ); For Station C, select
Codirectional ( Fig. 106. )

Enable OSPF routing protocol.

N.B. The OSPF area MUST be the same as OSPF area of OS port [ step 1 ) above]

N.B. The OSPF area MUST be the same as OSPF area of RF link.

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
202 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 105. Setup PPP link: DTE

Fig. 106. Setup PPP link: Codirectional

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 203 / 866
18.2.2 NMS Continuity without the Service Protection Box, through OS Ethernet port and
Ethernet port (of Enhanced Ethernet plugin)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


WARNING: the IDU must be equipped with the Enhanced Ethernet plugin, and the VLAN feature is

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
used

[1] Case 1: NMS continuity in backtoback

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
204 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 108. Case 1: VLAN configuration for NE A

b) At NE B ( Fig. 109. ):
1. The 2 Ethernet ports which connect to OS port, and NE Bs Ethernet port, must be the
members of a same VLAN.
2. The port which connect to OS port, must be untagged port of the VLAN.
3. In JUSM, Configuration > Network Configuration > Vlan configuration

Fig. 109. Case 1: VLAN configuration for NE B

N.B.
The VLAN ID of NE A and NE B can be the same or not the same.
It is recommended that NE A OS Ethernet IP address, PCs IP address, and NE B OS
Ethernet IP address are in the same subnetwork.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 205 / 866
[2] Case 2: NMS continuity through RF link

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


ODU ODU

document, use and communication of its contents not


CH1 CH1

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


all Ethernet cables

NE A

PC

NE B

Fig. 110. NMS continuity through RF link

In this case, NE A and NE B are not in the same station


We want to use CT to supervise NE A and NE B.

Cable connection ( Fig. 110. ):


NE A Ethernet port 33 connected to NE A OS port
The PC, running CT, connected to NE A Ethernet port 34
NE B Ethernet port 36 connected to NE B OS port
All cables are RJ45RJ45 Cat.5e Ethernet Direct cables (P/N 3CC52141Axxx, refer to
para.113.13.1 on page 113.13.1 for lengths).

N.B. this connection is an example. Operator can use any of the Ethernet ports.

VLAN software configuration procedure for case 2 ( Fig. 110. ):

N.B. The VLAN ID and VLAN names in Fig. 111. and Fig. 112. are examples. Operator should
follow IP administration policy in each field.

a) At NE A ( Fig. 111. ):

1. The 2 Ethernet ports which connect to OS port, Craft terminal, together with the radio
port, must be the members of a VLAN.

2. The port which connect to OS port, must be the members of untagged port of the VLAN.

3. In JUSM, Configuration > Network Configuration > Vlan configuration

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
206 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 111. Case 2: VLAN configuration for NE A

b) At NE B ( Fig. 112. ):

1. The Ethernet port connected to OS port, together with the radio port, must be the
members of a VLAN;

2. The port which connect to OS port, must be the members of untagged port of the VLAN.

3. In JUSM, Configuration > Network Configuration > Vlan configuration

Fig. 112. Case 2: VLAN configuration for NE B

N.B.
The VLAN ID of NE A and NE B must be the same.
It is recommended that NE A OS Ethernet IP address, PCs IP address, and NE B OS
Ethernet IP address are in the same subnetwork.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 207 / 866
18.3 General on interconnections with the Service Protection Box

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


These matters are taken into consideration, described in the following:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
the EOW audio continuity and EOW party line structure in 9400AWY R.2.1

the NMS channel and EOW audio continuity

the NMS channel and EOW audio continuity with the Service Protection Box

the available supports for the Service Protection Box

18.3.1 EOW audio continuity and EOW party line structure in 9400AWY R.2.1

The EOW audio continuity is meaningful only if all connected NEs have the EOW function.

As far as 9400AWY R.2.1 is concerned, this is true only if the Audio + User Service Channel plugin
is equipped.

Fig. 113. below shows the 9400AWY R.2.1 EOW party line structure.

Audio 1 signals, associated to NMSV11


(see Tab. 69. on page 322 )

EOW telephone set NEs


(see chapter 52 EOW party Radio interface
on page 743 ) line

Audio 2 signals, associated to NMSG703


(see Tab. 70. on page 323 )

Fig. 113. 9400AWY R.2.1 EOW party line

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
208 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.3.2 General on NMS channel and EOW audio continuity
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

The NMS channel continuity between two NEs is obtained, as described in Full Configuration
document, use and communication of its contents not

Procedures Step I on page 472 :


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

in case of the two 9400AWY R.2.1 NEs of the radio link, by means of the TMNRF channel

in case of two NEs not connected by radio, by means of the:

TMNV11 channel (NMSV11), implemented by wires

or, in alternative to each other:


TMNG703 channel (NMSG703), implemented by wires
or TMN inframe channel (NMSG703 inframe)

Fig. 114. below shows the continuity of NMS channel (and EOW audio, provided that the Audio + User
Service Channel plugin is equipped in 9400AWY R.2.1) for a NENE point to point connection:

NE A NE B

NMSV11 (+ Audio 1 signals) or NMSG703 (+ Audio 2 signals)

Fig. 114. NMS channel and EOW audio continuity in a NENE point to point connection

Fig. 115. below shows the continuity of NMS channel (and EOW audio, provided that the Audio + User
Service Channel plugin is equipped in 9400AWY R.2.1) for a NENE ring connection.
WARNING as shown in Fig. 115. , in a NENE audio ring connection, the audio loop makes the
conversation disturbed. To avoid that, you can:
open the audio loop, not connecting the audio signal wires between two NEs
or perform the audio squelch in only one of the 9400AWY R.2.1 NEs present in the
ring, disabling the party line by the screen of Fig. 228. on page 478 , or by the
screen of Fig. 286. on page 556

WRONG CONFIGURATION CORRECT CONFIGURATION

NMSG703 NE B NMSG703
NMSV11 NE B
(+ Audio 2) (+ Audio 2)
(+ Audio 1) NMSV11

full audio
ring causes NE C audio not
NE A NE A NE C
disturbance connected or
audio squelch
NMSV11 NMSG703 NMSV11 NMSG703
(+ Audio 1) NE D (+ Audio 2) (+ Audio 1) NE D (+ Audio 2)

?*!$&*?

Fig. 115. NMS channel and EOW audio continuity in a NENE ring connection

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 209 / 866
18.3.3 NMS channel and EOW audio continuity with the Service Protection Box

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


As shown in table on page 195 , in most cases the network interconnections on 9400AWY Rel.2.1

document, use and communication of its contents not


are made on the lineside connectors of the Service Protection Box, that therefore, when present

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


in the networkrelevant figure of next paragraphs, must be always be present, independently from
1+0 or 1+1 system configuration, and independently from with/without EPS system
configuration.

Following Fig. 116. (for 1+0 configurations) and Fig. 117. (for 1+1 configurations) show the
standard interconnections between IDU and Service Protection Box. Such interconnections are done
through the following cables:

Ref. in Fig. 116. & Fig. 117. Cable code Description


ABC 3CC52116AAAA Cord SubD44Male SubD44Male

In the networkrelevant figures of next paragraphs, it is assumed that this standard interconnection,
between IDU and Service Protection Box, has already been done, so that they are not repeated in
such networkrelevant figures, but denoted by a generic block like this:

Service Protection Box

IDU

For details of the Service Protection Box, see para.112.5 from page 301 ; in particular, for its
connectors:
ESC see point [4] on page 305
NMS_V11 AUDIO1 see point [2] on page 303
NMSG703AUDIO 2 see point [3] on page 304

Moreover, some networkrelevant figure of next paragraphs specifies NMS Ethernet connection,
that must be done on the connector depicted in following Fig. 116. and Fig. 117. , too.

For details on cables used in the various network configurations (listed in the associated tables), see
Tab. 72. from page 327

N.B. GNE = Gateway Network Element


for connectors on Melodie equipment, refer to relevant documentation

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
210 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
Connectors to use for
network interconnections
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Line side
Service Protection Box
Equipment side

Connector to use for


NMS Ethernet
network interconnections B
C
Main Unit

Fig. 116. Standard interconnections between IDU and Service Protection Box (1+0 configurations)

Connectors to use for


network interconnections

Line side
Service Protection Box
Equipment side

Connector to use for


NMS Ethernet
network interconnections
A B
C
Main Unit

Extension Unit

Fig. 117. Standard interconnections between IDU and Service Protection Box (1+1 configurations)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 211 / 866
18.3.4 Available supports for the Service Protection Box

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


As depicted in Fig. 21. on page 81 , and in point f ) on page 244 , two types of support kits are

document, use and communication of its contents not


available:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


one, allowing to mount two Service Protection Boxes, as shown in Fig. 118. below [example
for the NMS interconnection of two 9400AWY NE (1+1) radio protected].
This is the standard solution when the E1 Protection Box is not needed

NE1

NMS Interconnections between Service Protection


line sides of Service Protection Boxes Box
equipment side (NE2)

Service Protection
Box
equipment side (NE1)

NE2

Fig. 118. Two Service Protection Boxes mounted on one support

the other one is mandatory when also the E1 Protection Box is needed, as shown in Fig. 119.
below [example for the NMS interconnection of two 9400AWY NE (1+1) fully protected].

NMS Interconnections between


line sides of Service Protection Boxes
Service Protection Box
equipment side

NE1

Service Protection Box


equipment side

NE2

Fig. 119. E1 & Service Protection Boxes mounted on one support

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
212 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.4 9400AWY 9400AWY interconnections with the Service Protection Box
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not

18.4.1 NMS Continuity with the Service Protection Box


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1 (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)
3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2 (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)
3CC52142AAAA
(1 m)
or RJ45 8 pins cross (IDU) NMS Ethernet IP DCN
3CC52142ABAA
(5 m)
3DB10101AAAA Sub.D 15 pins Adapter Adapter
3DB10095AAAA
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1 IP Router (IP DCN)
3DB10096AAAA
(6.4m)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 213 / 866
214 / 866
NMS_V11 Audio1
NMS_G703 Audio2
Service Service
Service Protection Box Protection Box
Protection Box Service
Protection Box

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


NMS_V11 Audio1

3CC52142AAAA or
3CC52142ABAA

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 120. NMS Continuity
Service
Protection Box
Service NMS_G703 Audio2
Protection Box

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
NMS_V11 Audio1
NMS_V11 Audio1
Service Service Service Service NMS_V11 Audio1
Protection Box Protection Box Protection Box Protection Box

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 121. NMS Continuity

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

215 / 866
216 / 866
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3
GNE

Service Service
ESC NMS_V11 AUDIO2 ESC NMS_V11 AUDIO2
Protection Box Protection Box
IDU
IDU

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


NMS Ethernet

Fig. 122. NMS Continuity on ESC


3DB10101AAAA + 3DB05952AAxx 3CC52142AAAA
3DB10101AAAA + 3DB05952AAxx
or
3CC52142ABAA

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
18.4.2 AUDIO Connection
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
document, use and communication of its contents not

para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1 (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)
3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2 (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 217 / 866
218 / 866
NMS_G703 Audio2
NMS_V11 Audio1
Service Service Service
Service Protection Box Protection Box Protection Box
Protection Box

NMS_G703 Audio2

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 123. AUDIO Connection
Service NMS_V11 Audio1
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
18.4.3 NMS Ring Protection with Audio Continuity
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
document, use and communication of its contents not

para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1 (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio1
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)
3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2 (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)
3CC52142AAAA
(1 m)
or RJ45 8 pins cross (IDU) NMS Ethernet (IDU) NMS Ethernet
3CC52142ABAA
(5 m)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 219 / 866
220 / 866
NMS_G703 Audio2
NMS_V11 Audio1
Service
Service Service Protection Box
Service
Protection Box Protection Box
Protection Box

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


3CC52142AAAA
or
3CC52142ABAA

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 124. NMS Ring protection with audio continuity
NMS_V11 Audio1
Service
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
18.4.4 ESC Continuity
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
document, use and communication of its contents not

para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB10087AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) ESC (IDU) ESC
3DB10088AAAA (6.4m)

Protection Box
Service
ESC
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box
Service
ESC
Protection Box
Service

Fig. 125. ESC Continuity

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 221 / 866
18.5 9400AWY MELODIE SNMP interconnections

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. For complete information on AlcatelLucent Melodie equipment, refer to the relevant

document, use and communication of its contents not


documentation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


18.5.1 NMS Continuity with Audio Connection

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB05922AA**
(1.6m)
or Sub.D 15 pins (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2 (IDU) NMS_G703 Audio2
3DB05923AA**
(6.4m)

3DB10063AAAA
(1.6m)
or Y cable sub D 15 AWY (IDU) NMS_V11 Melodie (IDU) NMS_V11
(2x Sub D 9) Audio1 and Audio1
3DB10064AAAA
(6.4m)
3CC52142AAAA
(1 m)
or RJ45 8 pins cross (IDU) NMS Ethernet IP DCN
3CC52142ABAA
(5 m)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
222 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
NMS_V11 Audio1

HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Service Service Service Service
Protection Box Protection Box Protection Box Protection Box

3CC52142AAAA
or
3CC52142ABAA

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 126. NMS continuity with Audio connection

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

223 / 866
18.5.2 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 classic)
N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB10089AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub D 15 Sub D 9 (IDU) ESC (IDU) ESC34
3DB10090AAAA (6.4m)
3DB10100AAAA (1 m) Adapter Sub D 37 (3x Sub D 9)

ESC
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box
Service

Fig. 127. Service Channel continuity (MELODIE 1+0 classic)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
224 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.5.3 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+0 Light)
N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
3CC52130AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub D 15Sub D 9 AWY (IDU) ESC Y cable Sub D 9 ESC3
3CC52131AAAA (6.4m)
Y cable sub D 37
3CC52121AAAA (1 m) Melodie ESC3/Alarm
(Sub D 9 + Sub D 25)

3CC52130AAAA or 3CC52131AAAA
ESC
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box
Service

Fig. 128. Service Channel continuity (MELODIE 1+0 Light)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 225 / 866
18.5.4 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1)
N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
3DB10091AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub D 15 Sub D 9 (IDU) ESC (IDU) ESC5
3DB10092AAAA (6.4m)

Protection Box
Service
ESC

Protection Box
Service

Fig. 129. Service Channel continuity (MELODIE 1+1)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
226 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.5.5 Service Channel Continuity (MELODIE 1+1)
N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212


document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327
Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment
3DB10089AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub D 15 Sub D 9 (IDU) ESC (IDU) ESC34
3DB10090AAAA (6.4m)

Protection Box
ESCService
Protection Box
Service

Fig. 130. Service Channel continuity (MELODIE 1+1)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 227 / 866
18.6 9400AWY MELODIE RQ2 interconnections

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. For complete information on AlcatelLucent Melodie equipment, refer to the relevant

document, use and communication of its contents not


documentation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


18.6.1 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Classic)

N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,
para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment

3DB10063AAAA
(1.6m)
or Y cable sub D 15
(IDU) NMS_V11 Audio 1 (IDU) ESC345
(2x Sub D 9)
3DB10064AAAA
(6.4m)

3DB10100AAAA Adapter Sub D 37


(1m) (3x Sub D 9)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
228 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
NMS_V11 AUDIO1

Service Service
Protection Box Protection Box

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 131. 9400AWY NMS V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 classic)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

229 / 866
18.6.2 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 Light)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

document, use and communication of its contents not


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment

3CC52119AAAA
(1.6m)
or Y cable sub D 15
(IDU) NMS_V11 Audio 1 (IDU) ESC5
(2x Sub D 9)
3CC52120AAAA
(6.4m)

3CC52121AAAA Y cable sub D 37


(1m) (Sub D 9 + Sub D 25)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
230 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
NMS_V11 AUDIO1

Service Service
Protection Box Protection Box

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 132. 9400AWY NMS V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+0 light)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

231 / 866
18.6.3 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

document, use and communication of its contents not


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment

3DB10063AAAA
(1.6m)

or Y cable sub D 15 (2x Sub D 9) (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio 1 (IDU) ESC34

3DB10064AAAA
(6.4m)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
232 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
NMS_V11 AUDIO1
Service Service
Protection Box Protection Box

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 133. 9400AWY NMS V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

233 / 866
18.6.4 9400AWY NMS_V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1)

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

document, use and communication of its contents not


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment

3DB10063AAAA
(1.6m)

or Y cable sub D 15 (2x Sub D 9) (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio 1 (IDU) ESC5

3DB10064AAAA
(6.4m)

3CC52132AAAA
Sub D 25 Sub D 9 (IDU) NMS_V11 Audio 1
(1m)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
234 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

USER MANUAL
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
NMS_V11 AUDIO1

Service Service
Protection Box Protection Box

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


Fig. 134. 9400AWY NMS V11 Transport (MELODIE 1+1)

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

235 / 866
18.6.5 RQ2 9.6 Kb/s Transport
N.B. For correct interpretation of figures and tables in this paragraph, read carefully, if not yet done,

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


para.18.3 on pages 208 to 212

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
WARNING: cables are depicted schematically; for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and
pin connection tables) refer to chapter 113 from page 327

Cable Code Cable Type From Equipment To Equipment


3DB10093AAAA (1.6m)
or Sub D 15 Sub D 9 (IDU) ESC (IDU) NMS1
3DB10094AAAA (6.4m)

ESC
Protection Box
Service
Protection Box
Service

Fig. 135. RQ2 9.6 Kb/s Transport

9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3 USER MANUAL


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
236 / 866 3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01
18.7 E1 interconnections between 9400AWY and 9500MPRE MSS
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

N.B. These examples are referred to the 9500MPRE MSS8 base band. For complete information
document, use and communication of its contents not

on AlcatelLucent 9500MPRE equipment, refer to the relevant documentation.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

[1] Allowed configurations


Both 9400AWY and the 32xE1 access card of 9500MPRE must be configured as:
1+0
or 1+1 radio protected (fully protected configurations are not allowed)

[2] Interconnections
Interconnections are the same for the (1+0) and (1+1) configurations.
WARNING: for details on each cable (structure, connectors, and pin connection tables) refer to
chapter 113 from page 327

Interconnections for 16xE1 (example)


9400AWY 16xE1 IDU Main unit (example)
M1

32xE1 access card (example position)


A
1 2 9
3 4
5 6
7 8
M2
9500MPRE MSS8 (example)
Interconnections for 32xE1 (example)
9400AWY 32xE1 IDU Main unit (example) M1
M1

A 32xE1 access card (example position) B

1 2 9
3 4
5 6
7 8
M2
9500MPRE MSS8 (example) M2

A and B : cable 3CC52150AAAA (L=1.6 m) or 3CC52150ABAA (L=6.4 m)

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 237 / 866
238 / 866
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3

3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
USER MANUAL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
19 UNPACKING AND WAREHOUSING
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
document, use and communication of its contents not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

19.1 General

The following procedures have been issued and must be observed when unpacking the equipment.
The reciprocal operation must be done for repacking. In such case it is recommended to use the original
packing material.

The following sturdy outer packing material is utilized in order to protect the equipment against mechanical
and climatic stresses to which they are subjected:

wooden crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods longer than 60 days

plywood crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods of 30 to 60 days

cardboard boxes for transport by air or on road for periods of less than 30 days

19.2 Unpacking

19.2.1 Preliminary checks

The following information should be printed on the outer crate:

International symbols:

side up

keep dry

fragile

trade mark/address of the manufacturing company;


labels (or templated marks) indicating information on the contract and destination site of the product;
an envelope holding among others the packing list

Upon receipt check:

that the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label;
that no damage was made to the cases

Report any shipping damages to the Companys representative or the Shipping Agent.

USER MANUAL 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY V2.1.3


HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3DB 16142 JAAA Ed.01 239 / 866
19.2.2 Unpacking phases

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent


When having to unpack proceed as follows:

document, use and communication of its contents not


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
make sure that the packing has been properly positioned, refer to the symbol

open the case;

remove the shockproof material;

remove the goods from the case;

remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection;

remove the plastic bags cellotaped to the rack and containing accessories;

remove the dehydrating bags;

ascertain that the goods are not damaged and that they correspond to those indicated on the packing
list enclosed in the envelope. Conversely, contact the agencys representative.

N.B. When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for
packing again if it must be reshipped.